Sony DCR-TRV TRV130, TRV130E digital video camera recorder Service manual
Below you will find brief information for DCR-TRV130, DCR-TRV130E. This manual provides information on how to repair both model variations, covering their video recording system, audio system, video signal, and more. The manual also includes block diagrams, schematic diagrams and repair parts lists.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Level 2
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
RMT-814
Photo : DCR-TRV130E
US Model
Canadian Model
Korea Model
Brazilian Model
DCR-TRV130
AEP Model
UK Model
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-TRV130E
E Model
Hong Kong Model
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
M2000 MECHANISM
On the VC-256 board
This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the
VC-256 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts list of the VC-256 board are not shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Printed wiring board ......................... Pages 4-61 to 4-64
Schematic diagram .......................... Pages 4-31 to 4-60
Electrical parts list ............................ Pages 6-15 to 6-22
SPECIFICATIONS
For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT, refer to the
“8mm Video MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
MANUAL
IX
M2000 MECHANISM ” (9-929-
861-11).
NTSC model : DCR-TRV130
PAL model : DCR-TRV130E
— Continued on next page —
DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER
• SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK
0
OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK
0
ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
Table for difference of function
Model
Destination
Color system
LINE REC
DCR-TRV130
US,CND,E,HK,
KR,JE,BR
NTSC a
DCR-TRV130E
E,HK,AUS,
JE,CN
AEP,UK
PAL
✕✕
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
HK : Hong Kong model
AUS : Australian model
JE : Tourist model
Remark
DV signal only
CN : Chinese model
KR : Korea model
BR : Brazilian model
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE
0
SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.
2.
Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3.
Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
4.
Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
5.
Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6.
Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering.
— 2 —
SERVICE NOTE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Quick Reference
Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-27
1.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 6
2.
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT
(FORCE EJECT) ································································ 6
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1.
Self-diagnosis Function ······················································ 7
2.
Self-diagnosis Display ························································ 7
3.
Service Mode Display ························································ 7
3-1.
Display Method ·································································· 7
3-2.
Switching of Backup No. ··················································· 7
3-3.
End of Display ···································································· 7
4.
Self-diagnosis Code Table ·················································· 8
2.
DISASSEMBLY
2-1.
VIDEO LIGHT ································································ 2-2
2-2.
LCD SECTION (PD-131 BOARD) ································ 2-3
2-3.
FRONT PANEL SECTION (MI-041 BOARD) ·············· 2-4
2-4.
CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 2-5
2-5.
CABINET (R) SECTION, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000) ········································································ 2-6
2-6.
EVF SECTION (VF-129 BOARD) ································· 2-7
2-7.
BATTERY PANEL SECTION
(BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD) ································ 2-8
2-8.
LENS SECTION ····························································· 2-9
2-9.
VC-256 BOARD ····························································· 2-9
2-10. MECHANISM DECK ··················································· 2-12
2-11. HINGE SECTION ························································· 2-12
2-12. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13
2-13. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
1.
GENERAL
Checking supplied accessories ·················································· 1-1
Quick Start Guide ······································································ 1-1
Getting started
Using this manual ·································································· 1-1
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································ 1-2
Installing the battery pack ···················································· 1-2
Charging the battery pack ···················································· 1-2
Connecting to the mains ······················································ 1-3
Step 2 Setting the date and time ············································ 1-3
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ······················································ 1-4
Recording –Basics
Recording a picture ································································ 1-4
Shooting backlit subjects –BACK LIGHT ·························· 1-6
Shooting in the dark –NightShot/Super NightShot ············· 1-6
Checking the recording –END SEARCH ···························· 1-7
Playback –Basics
Playing back a tape ································································ 1-7
Viewing the recording on TV ················································ 1-9
Advanced Recording Operations
Recording a still image on a tape –Tape Photo recording ····· 1-9
Using the wide mode ··························································· 1-10
Using the fader function ······················································ 1-10
Using special effects –Picture effect ···································· 1-11
Using special effects –Digital effect ···································· 1-12
Using the PROGRAM AE function ····································· 1-12
Adjusting the exposure manually ········································ 1-13
Focusing manually ······························································· 1-13
Superimposing a title ··························································· 1-14
Making your own titles ························································ 1-14
Using the built-in light ························································· 1-15
Advanced Playback Operations
Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························ 1-16
Playing back a tape with digital effects ······························· 1-16
Enlarging images recorded on tapes –Tape PB ZOOM ······· 1-17
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function ·· 1-17
Searching a recording by date –Date search ························ 1-18
Searching for a photo –Photo search/Photo scan ················· 1-18
Editing
Dubbing a tape ····································································· 1-19
Customizing Your Camcorder
Changing the menu settings ················································· 1-20
Troubleshooting
Tupes of trouble and their solutions ···································· 1-21
Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-22
Warning indicators and messages ········································ 1-23
Additional Information
About video cassettes ·························································· 1-23
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ····························· 1-24
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-24
Using your camcorder abroad ·············································· 1-25
Maintenance information and precautions ··························· 1-25
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5) ··························· 3-1
3-2.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5) ··························· 3-3
3-3.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5) ··························· 3-5
3-4.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5) ··························· 3-7
3-5.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5) ··························· 3-9
3-6.
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ······························ 3-11
3-7.
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-13
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1.
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3
4-2.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5
• CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7
• CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-8
• MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-9
• MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP)(1/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11
• MI-041 (IR DRIVE)(2/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
• PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-15
• PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR)(1/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
• PD-131 (BACK LIGHT)(2/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
• VF-129 (B/W EVF)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-23
• VF-129 (B/W EVF)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27
• LS-057 (S/T REEL SENSOR), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR),
FP-299 (MODE SWITCH), FP-300 (TAPE TOP),
FP-302 (TAPE END), FP-301 (TAPE LED)
FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ·························· 4-29
• FP-258 (VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
FLEXIBLE BOARD AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
— 3 —
Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the
VC-256 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-31 to 4-64 are not shown.
4-3.
WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-65
4-4.
MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-69
5.
ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Before starting adjustment ··············································· 5-2
1-1.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ·· 5-2
5-1.
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 5-4
1-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
(CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 5-4
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-4
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-5
1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 5-7
1.
Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-7
2.
Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-7
3.
Subjects ··········································································· 5-7
1-2.
INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA ····· 5-8
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA ·················· 5-8
1.
Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data ···································· 5-8
2.
Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data ·································· 5-8
3.
C Page Table ···································································· 5-8
4.
D Page Table ···································································· 5-9
5.
8 Page Table ··································································· 5-10
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA ················· 5-11
1.
Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data ··································· 5-11
2.
Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data ································· 5-11
3.
F Page Table ·································································· 5-11
4.
E Page Table ·································································· 5-12
5.
7 Page Table ··································································· 5-12
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-13
1.
HALL Adjustment ························································· 5-13
2.
Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-14
3.
Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More
Than 500m Away) ························································· 5-15
3-1.
Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 5-15
3-2.
Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 5-15
4.
Flange Back Check ························································ 5-16
5.
Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-16
6.
Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-17
7.
Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input ··········· 5-18
8.
Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-19
9.
White Balance Check ···················································· 5-20
10.
Angular Velocity Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ·········· 5-21
1-4.
MONOCHROME ELECTRONIC VIEWFINEDER
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ·········································· 5-22
1-4-1. Horizontal Slant Check ················································· 5-22
1-4-2. Centering Adjustment ··················································· 5-22
1-4-3. Focus Adjustment ························································· 5-22
1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment ·················································· 5-23
1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board) ······ 5-23
1-4-6. Vertical Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board) ··········· 5-24
1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment (VF-129 board) ························ 5-24
1-4-8. Horizontal Amplitude, Vertical Amplitude,
Focus Check ·································································· 5-24
1-5.
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-25
1.
LCD Initial Data Input (1) ············································· 5-25
2.
LCD Initial Data Input (2) ············································· 5-26
3.
VCO Adjustment (PD-131 board) ································· 5-26
4.
RGB AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) ························ 5-27
5.
Contrast Adjustment (PD-131 board) ···························· 5-27
6.
COM AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board) ······················· 5-28
7.
V-COM Adjustment (PD-131 board) ···························· 5-28
8.
White Balance Adjustment (PD-131 board) ·················· 5-29
— 4 —
5-2.
MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 5-30
2-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-30
2-2.
HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-30
2-3.
HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-30
2-4.
TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 5-31
2-4-1. Preparations for Adjustment ·········································· 5-31
2-4-2. Tape Path adjustment ····················································· 5-32
2-4-3. No.7 Guide (TG7) Adjustment ······································ 5-33
2-4-4. CUE, REV Waveforms Check ······································· 5-33
2-5.
CHECKS AFTER ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-33
2-5-1. Waveform Build-up Check ············································ 5-33
2-5-2. Tape Path Check ···························································· 5-33
5-3.
VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT ······························ 5-34
3-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 5-34
3-1-1. Equipment to Required ·················································· 5-34
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 5-35
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 5-36
3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 5-36
3-1-5. Alignment Tape ····························································· 5-37
3-1-6. Output Level and Impedance ········································· 5-37
3-2.
SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-38
1.
Initialization of C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data ···················· 5-38
2.
Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-38
2-1.
Company ID Input ························································· 5-38
2-2.
Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-38
3-3.
SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 5-40
1.
REEL FG Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ························ 5-40
2.
CAP FG Duty Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ················· 5-40
3.
PLL fo & LPF fo Pre-Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ······ 5-41
4.
Switching Position Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·········· 5-41
5.
AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment ········· 5-42
5-1.
Preparations before adjustments ···································· 5-42
5-2.
AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·········· 5-42
5-3.
APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ··················· 5-42
5-4.
Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 5-43
6.
PLL fo & LPF fo Fine Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ···· 5-43
3-4.
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-44
1.
27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-44
2.
Chroma BPF fo Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ··············· 5-44
3.
S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-45
4.
S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
(VC-256 Board) ····························································· 5-45
5.
VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-256 Board) ·· 5-46
3-5.
IR TRANSMITTER ADJUSTMENTS (DCR-TRV130) ·· 5-47
1.
IR Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ·· 5-47
2.
IR Video Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ·········· 5-47
3.
IR Audio Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board) ········· 5-48
3-6.
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 5-49
1.
Playback Level Check ··················································· 5-49
5-4.
SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-50
4-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-50
1.
Using the Adjustment Remote Commander ·················· 5-50
2.
Precautions Upon Using the Adjustment Remote
Commander ··································································· 5-50
4-2.
DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-51
4-3.
SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-52
1.
Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-52
2.
Emergence Memory Address ········································ 5-52
2-1.
C Page Emergence Memory Address ···························· 5-52
2-2.
EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 5-53
2-3.
MSW Code ···································································· 5-54
3.
Bit Value Discrimination ··············································· 5-55
4.
Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-55
5.
Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-55
6.
Switch check (3) ···························································· 5-55
7.
Switch check (4) ···························································· 5-56
8.
Record of Use check ······················································ 5-56
9.
Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 5-57
6.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1.
EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 6-2
6-1-3. EVF SECTION ································································ 6-3
6-1-4. LENS SECTION ····························································· 6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION ··············································· 6-5
6-1-6. LCD SECTION ······························································· 6-6
6-1-7. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY, DRUM ASSY ··· 6-7
6-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······························· 6-8
6-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ······ 6-9
6-1-10. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ··· 6-10
6-2.
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 6-11
Parts list of the VC-256 board are not shown.
Pages from 6-15 to 6-22 are not shown.
*
Color reproduction frame is shown on page 179.
— 5 —
SERVICE NOTE
1.
POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS
In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied (8.4V) to the battery terminal using the service power code (J-6082-223-A), the power is shut off so that the unit cannot operate.
These following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.
Method 1.
Use the DC IN terminal. (Use the AC power adaptor.)
Method 2.
Connect the adjustment remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the HOLD switch to the “ADJ” side.
2.
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)
1
Refer to 2-3. to remove the front panel section.
2
Refer to 2-4. to remove the cabinet (L) section.
3
Refer to 2-5. to remove the cabinet (R) section.
4
Open the control switch block (FK-1000).
5 Disconnect CN4401 (2P) of VC-256 board.
6
Add +5V from the DC POWER SUPPLY and unload with a pressing the cassette compertment.
7
Pull the timing belt in the direction of arrow
A
with a pincette while pressing the cassette compartment (take care not to damage) to adjust the bending of a tape.
A
Timing belt
Pincette
Timing belt
Press the cassette compartment not to rise the cassette compartment
8
Let your hold the cassette
compartment and rise the cassette
compartment to take out a cassette.
DC power supply
(+5V)
Adjust the bending of a tape
Loading motor
Disconnect CN4401 of
VC-256 board
— 6 —
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1.
Self-diagnosis Function
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD or
Display window what to do. This function consists of two display; self-diagnosis display and service mode display.
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction manual.
Viewfinder or LCD
C : 3 1 : 1 1
Display window
C : 3 1 : 11
2.
Self-diagnosis Display
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the viewfinder or LCD or Display window shows a 4-digit display consisting of an alphabet and numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This
5-character display indicates the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem occurred, and “detailed code” of the problem.
Display window
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C 3 1
1 1
Repaired by:
C : Corrected by customer
H : Corrected by dealer
E : Corrected by service engineer
Block
Indicates the appropriate step to be taken.
E.g.
31 ....Reload the tape.
32 ....Turn on power again.
Detailed Code
Refer to page 8 and 9.
Self-diagnosis Code Table.
3.
Service Mode Display
The service mode display shows up to six self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.
3-1.
Display Method
While pressing the “STOP” key, set the switch from OFF to “VCR or PLAYER”, and continue pressing the “STOP” key for 5 seconds continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis codes.
Viewfinder or LCD
[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1
Display window
3 C : 3 1 : 11
Lights up
[3]
C : 3 1 : 1 1
Backup No.
Self-diagnosis Codes
Order of previous errors
Control dial
3-2.
Switching of Backup No.
By rotating the control dial, past self-diagnosis codes will be shown in order. The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the number of problems which occurred will be shown.)
[1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time
[2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time
[3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time
3-3.
End of Display
Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.
Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the built-in rechargeable lithium battery (CF-1000 block BT101).
When the cabinet (R) assembly is disconnected, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.
— 7 —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
1
0
0
0
1
1
2
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C
C
C
C
0
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
C 3
4.
Self-diagnosis Code Table
Self-diagnosis Code
Block
Function
Detailed
Code
Symptom/State Correction
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
Non-standard battery is used.
Condensation.
Video head is dirty.
LOAD direction. Loading does not complete within specified time
UNLOAD direction. Loading does not complete within specified time
T reel side tape slacking when unloading.
S reel side tape slacking when unloading.
T reel fault.
S reel fault.
FG fault when starting capstan.
FG fault during normal capstan operations.
FG fault when starting drum.
PG fault when starting drum.
FG fault during normal drum operations.
PG fault during normal drum operations.
Phase fault during normal drum operations.
LOAD direction loading motor timeout.
UNLOAD direction loading motor time-out.
T reel side tape slacking when unloading.
S reel side tape slacking when unloading.
T reel fault.
S reel fault.
FG fault when starting capstan.
FG fault during normal capstan operations.
FG fault when starting drum.
PG fault when starting drum.
FG fault during normal drum operations.
PG fault during normal drum operations.
Phase fault during normal drum operations.
Use the InfoLITHIUM battery.
Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour.
Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform operations from the beginning.
— 8 —
E
E
E
E
Self-diagnosis Code
Block
Function
Detailed
Code
6
6
6
6
1
1
2
2
0
1
0
0
Symptom/State Correction
0
0
0
1
Difficult to adjust focus
(Cannot initialize focus.)
Zoom operations fault
(Cannot initialize zoom lens.)
Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin qs of CN1551 of
VC-256 board) when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated in the focus manual mode and the focus motor drive circuit
(IC1551 of VC-256 board) when the focusing is not performed.
Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin qf of CN1551 of
VC-256 board) when zooming is performed when the zoom lens is operated and the zoom motor drive circuit (IC1551 of VC-256 board) when zooming is not performed.
Handshake correction function does not work well. (With pitch angular velocity sensor output stopped.)
Handshake correction function does not work well. (With yaw angular velocity sensor output stopped.)
Inspect pitch angular velocity sensor (SE751 of MI-041 board) peripheral circuits.
Inspect yaw angular velocity sensor (SE752 of MI-041 board) peripheral circuits.
— 9 —
SECTION 1
GENERAL
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
This section is extracted from instruction manual. (DCR-TRV130E model)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-29E
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
2-1. Video light
2-2. LCD section (PD-131 board)
2-3. Front panel section (MI-041 board)
2-4. Cabinet (L) section
2-5. Cabinet (R) section, Control switch block (CF-1000)
2-6. EVF section (VF-129 board)
2-7, Battery panel section (Battery terminal board)
2-8, Lens section
2-9. VC-256 board
2-10. Mechanism deck
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
PD-131 board service position
MI-041 board service position
Mechanism deck service position
Note : Use the parts only which can be removed
easily from outside of the mechanism deck.
VF-129, CD-281, MI-041 boards service position
2-11. Hinge section
Service position to check the VTR section
Service position to check the Camera section
2-1
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENTS]
Info lithium battery
(L series)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
CN1011
1 2
19 20
Two claws
CPC lid
AC power adaptor
AC IN
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. VIDEO LIGHT
1
Push in the dent
inside hole with
wire tip.
3
Remove in the direction
of the arrow
A
.
A
2
Video light
4
Halogen lamp
2-2
2-2. LCD SECTION (PD-131 BOARD)
3
Five claws
4
P cabinet C
2
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
A
9
PD-131 board,
Panel frame
8
Back light
Cold cathode
fluorescent tube
7
Liquid crystal
indicator module
PD-131
A
5
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
7)
6
P cabinet M assembly
1
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
[PD-131 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
Info lithium battery
(L series)
PD-131 board
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
Panel frame (12)
Multi CPC jig
(J-6082-311-A)
CN5502
PD-131
Back light
Cold cathode fluorescent tube
Liquid crystal indicator module
AC power adaptor
AC IN
2-3
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION (MI-041 BOARD)
1
Open the jack cover
3
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
2
Two MI screws
(M2
×
4) (H)
5
Claw
7
Front panel section
4
Two MI screws
(M2
×
4) (H)
6
FP-263 flexible
board (24P)
3
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
MI-041
Board
4
MI-041 board
2
Microphone (Lch) (2P)
1
Microphone (Rch) (2P)
[MI-041 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
AC power adaptor
AC IN
FP-263 flexible board (24P)
MI-041
Info lithium battery
(L series)
MI-041 board
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
1
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
5
Microphone (Rch)
2
Four claws
4
Microphone
retainer (front)
3
Microphone
retainer (rear)
6
Microphone (Lch)
2-4
2-4. CABINET (L) SECTION
1
3
Cassette lid assembly
2
Two MI screws
(M2
×
4) (H)
4
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
6
Two MI screws
(M2
×
4) (H)
5
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
7
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
[MECHANISM DECK SERVICE POSITION]
Note: Use the parts only which can be removed easily from outside of the mechanism deck.
8
Cabinet (L) section
Mechanism deck
AC power adaptor
AC IN
2-5
2-5. CABINET (R) SECTION, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)
1
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
4
Claw
2
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
7
Cabinet (R) section
6
FFC-295 flexible
flat cable (24P)
5
Harness
(PD-110) (20P)
3
Three MI screws
(M2
×
4) (H)
7
Remove the control switch block
(CF-1000) in the direction of the
arrow
A B
.
A
Tape (A)
B
6
Tape (A)
8
Control switch block
(CF-1000)
3
Electro luminous
element (4P)
5
Five tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
1
FFC-295 flexible flat cable (24P)
2
FP-260 flexible board (16P)
4
Push switch (2P)
2-6
2-6. EVF SECTION (VF-129 BOARD)
3
EVF section
4
1
FFC-289 flexible
flat cable (4P)
3
Finder (S) assembly
Rotate it in the direction of
the arrow
B
and remove it
in the direction of the arrow
C
.
2
Three tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
1
Tape (A)
2
Two loose
stopper screws
(M2
×
3)
3
VF base B
PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION
Tape (A)
FFC-289 flexible flat cable
4
B
C
A
1
F lock
screw (T)
2
Slide the button in the
direction of the arrow
A
.
8
CRT assembly, VF-129 board,
FFC-289 flexible flat cable
4
EVF cabinet
upper B assembly
3
Claw
2
Two tapping
screws
(B2
×
5)
5
Tapping screw
(B2
×
5)
6
EVF tally
1
7
EVF cabinet lower B
1
VF hinge assembly
2
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
REMOVING THE CRT ASSEMBLY AND VF-129 BOARD
2
CRT socket (4P)
6
CRT assembly
4
High voltage
cover
5
Anode cable (1P)
Do not pull the cable,
but remove it in the
vertical direction.
3
Remove the high voltage
cover with a flat head
(–) screwdriver.
7
VF-129 board
1
CRT DT connector (4P)
High voltage cover
2-7
[VF-129, CD-281, MI-041 BOARDS SERVICE POSITION]
CD-281 board
FP-263 flexible board (24P)
MI-041
MI-041 board
Info lithium battery
(L series)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
CRT assembly
VF-129 board
FFC-289 flexible flat cable (4P)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
2-7. BATTERY PANEL SECTION (BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD)
1
Tripod screw
4
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
5
Claw
2
Strap sheet
metal (lower)
1
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
3
Battery terminal board
2-8
7
Control switch block
(SS-1000) (5P)
3
MI screw
(M2
×
4) (H)
2
Battery terminal board (7P)
6
Battery panel section
2-8. LENS SECTION
2
Flexible board
(from lens block)(24P)
VC
-256
Board
1
FP-259 flexible
board (14P)
5
Claw
4
Two screws
(M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
6
3
Screw
(M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
1
Two tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
2
Lens frame
3
Lens section
2-9. VC-256 BOARD
3
4
Jack cushion
Two screws
(M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
7
Control switch block
(FK-1000) (12P)
5
FP-258 flexible board
8
VC-256 board
A
B
C
D
VC-256
Board
A
B
C
D
2
MD frame B
1
Two screws (M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
6
Screw (M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
2-9
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE VTR SECTION]
Connection to Check the VTR Section
To check the VTR section, set the VTR to the "Forced VTR power ON" mode.
Operate the VTR functions using the adjustment remote commander (with the HOLD switch set in the OFF position).
Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
Exiting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Note: If the machine malfunctions (the operating mode changes by itself), connect the FK-1000 block,
CF-1000 block.
When you eject the cassette, connect Pin qa
and Pin qs
(GND) of
CN1008 on VC-256 board for 1 second.
CN1008
12 1
Mechanism deck
Control switch block (FK-1000)
FP-258 flexible board
Audio
Monitor TV
Video
A/V out jack
Info lithium battery
(L series)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
VC-256
Board
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
AC power adaptor
AC IN
Battery terminal board
VC-256 board
FFC-295 flexible flat cable (24P)
Control switch block
(CF-1000)
2-10
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE CAMERA SECTION]
Connection to Check the Camera Section
To check the camera section, set the camera to the "Forced camera power ON" mode.
Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode
1)
2)
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Note: If the machine malfunctions (the operating mode changes by itself), connect the FK-1000 block,
CF-1000 block.
Control switch block (FK-1000) (12P)
When you operate the zoom, connect the FK-1000 block to
CN1008 of VC-256 board.
Mechanism deck
FP-258 flexible board
Audio
VC-256 board
AC power adaptor
Battery terminal board
AC IN
Flexible board
(from lens block) (24P)
FP-259 flexible board (14P)
Monitor TV
VC-256
Board
Video
Lens block
A/V out jack
FFC-295 flexible flat cable (24P)
Info lithium battery
(L series)
Control switch block
(CF-1000)
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
CPC-jig
(J-6082-521-A)
2-11
2-10.MECHANISM DECK
4
Control switch block
(FK-1000)
1
Screw
(M2
×
3),
lock ace, p2
REMOVING THE MECHANISM DECK
6
Mechanism deck
1
Three screws
(M1.7
×
2.5), p
3
2
absorbing
sheet
2
Two claws
3
Three
dowels
5
MD sheet
4
MD frame A
2-11.HINGE SECTION
5
Hinge blind,
Push switch
3
Electro luminous
element (4P)
1
FP-260 flexible
board (16P)
2
Push switch (2P)
REMOVING THE HINGE ASSEMBLY
7
Control switch block
(PR-10000)
3
Hinge cover M
5
Harness (PD-110)
4
Harness clamp
4
Three tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
1
Four
claws
6
Screw
(M1.7
×
2.5), p
A
1
Four tapping
screws (B2
×
5)
8
Hinge assembly
2
Hinge
cover C
2
A
2-12
2-12.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)
MI-041
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP,
IR DRIVE (TRV130 ONLY)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
VF-129
(B/W EVF)
VC-256
CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA Y/C PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE, EVR, DV SIGNAL PROCESS,
DV INTERFACE, DIGITAL REC/PB AMP, VIDEO OUT, HI CONTROL,
CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL, MECHANISM CONTROL,
DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, AUDIO PROCESS, DC IN,
CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER
2-13
2-13.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck are not shown.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(FK-1000)
FFC-289
FP-258
(VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(SS-1000)
FP-259
FFC-295
FP-263
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(PR-10000)
FP-260
IRIS FLEXIBLE
ASSEMBLY 630
ELECTRO LUMINOUS ELEMENT
(BACK LIGHT)
2-14E
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/5)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
LENS ASSY
NIGHT
SHOT
M904
ZOOM
RESET
SENSOR
ZOOM MOTOR
M
FOCUS MOTOR
M905
FOCUS
RESET
SENSOR
M
IRIS
H
IRIS
METER
M
CD-281 BOARD
CN1551
21 14 12 8 5
ZOOM
A,B,XA,XB
4 1
FOCUS
A,B,XA,XB
5 7 17 19 2 4 21 23
ZOOM
MOTOR
DRIVE
13 16
IC1551
(4-35)
FOCUS
MOTOR
DRIVE
9 12
EN1
DIR1A
DIR1B
EN0
DIR0A
DIR0B
20
IRIS
HALL(-)
5
23
IRIS DRIVE(-)
8
HALL
AMP
IC1552
IRIS
DRIVE
7
HALL
AD
(4-35)
10
IRIS PWM
MI-041 BOARD
SE751
PITCH SENSOR
SE752
YAW SENSOR
(4-11)
8
12
IC753
PITCH/YAW
SENSOR
AMP
2
18
PITCH AD
CN753
18
YAW AD
19
18
CN1002
19
(4-8)
IC191
CCD
IMAGER
1 4 12 14
7
Q191
BUFFER
V1-V4,RG,H1,H2
VC-256 BOARD(1/4)
(4-32)
IC1502
1
14
CN191
7
1
18
14
CN1501
31
18
CCD OUT
(4-32)
IC1501
TIMING
GENERATOR
1
2
15
16
30
CLPOB
PBLK
XSHP
XSHD
20
23
S/H
AGC
12
SPCK
X1501
27MHz
4
5
XCS KINUTA
(IC4902)
39
44
45
38
37
46 47 48
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
XCS CH,CH SO,XCH SCK
IRIS PWM,HALL AD
FC RST,ZM RST
LENS FILTER ON SW
A/D
CONV.
2
11
16
AD1-AD10
PITCH AD,YAW AD
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(3/5)
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
SPCK
HD,VD
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
EN0,EN1
DIR0A,B
DIR1A,B
FC RST,ZM RST
110
111
50
52
136
144
137
138
(4-33)
131
121
IC2201
CAMERA
SIGNAL
PROCESS
FOCUS/
ZOOM
MOTOR
CONTROL
SPCK
VCK
46
42
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK
IFI VD, IFI OE
MIC
902
MIC
L
MIC
901
MIC
R
J001
HEAD PHONE
SP901
SPEAKER
1
CN751
1
CN752
L
R
(4-11)
IC751
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
1
2
19
(4-11)
IC752
MIC AMP
9
12
(TRV130)
D3901,3902
(LASER LINK)
22
(4-13)
IC3901
IR
TRANSMITTER
MIC L
MIC R
46
48
42
18
7
21
23
21
23
SIRCS
7
6
4
15
1
16
7
6
IR L,R
4
15
1
IR VIDEO
SIRCS PWM
IR FSC
(IC3301)
16
XSIRCS SIG
FP-258
(FLEXIBLE)(1/3)
(SEE PAGE 4-55)
J201
A/V OUT
J201
S VIDEO
Y
C
V
L
R
10
8
12
13
CN1001
15
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)
(1/2)
4
2
21
CN1007
HP L,R
23
16
1
2
CN003
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
12
11
13
14
SP+,-
VSP SO,XVSP SCK
46
49
IR L,R
62
63
14 15
(4-54)
IC5401
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
54
55
HP L,R 64
2
SP+,8
10
13
25
23
19
17
L,R
L,R
XCS AU
(IC4501)
(4-54)
15
16
3
2
IC5402
AUDIO
A/D CONV.
D/A CONV.
8
9
12
XCS TAKO
(IC4501)
Y
C
V
18
14
11
22
9 10
(4-44)
IC3701
(TAKO)
VIDEO
OUT
IR V
24
46
7
Y
C
68
61
Y0-Y7
59
C0-C3
56
70
71
72
HD,VD,OE
54
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SPCK(IC1501)
XCS KINUTA
(IC4902)
VD, OE
SPCK
Y0-Y7
C0-C3
HD,VD,OE
DATA TO SFD
DATA FROM SFD
SFD BCK
CAIN Y
CAIN C
SIRCS PWM
SIRCS SIG
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK
(2/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-3)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(2/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-3)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(4/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-8)
3-1 3-2
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/5)
VC-256 BOARD(2/4)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-2)
Y0-Y7
C0-C3
HD, VD, OE
SPCK
Y0-Y7
C0-C3
HD,VD,OE
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
199 201
203 205
207 211
213 215
1 3
5 7
17
21
23
(4-37)
IC3301
(CAIN)
DV SIGNAL
PROCESS
138
139
X3301
24.576MHz
142 45
L BUS
145 42
51
141
151
TRCK
LCK
VREF
133
132
127
99
97
152
153
156
PRRV,TRRV,TRRT
DATA TO SFD
DATA FROM SFD
SFD BCK
47
79
(4-40)
IC3303
(LIP)
DV INTERFACE
6
9
29
37
TPA+,-
TPB+,-
MC BUS
CN1001
1
5
REC CK
REC DT
J202
DV IN/OUT
FP-258
(2/3)
(FLEXIBLE)
(SEE PAGE 4-55)
IR FCS
8
IC3302
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
20
19
HD
VD
(4-39)
18
17
16
14
COL0
COL3
1 3
184
183
195
194
191
190
182
48
83
88
81
79
170
179
6
MC BUS
159
161
163
162
VSP SO, SI, SCK
75
73
71
105
106
PANEL G
PANEL R
PANEL B
PANEL XHD,XVD
XCS SFD (IC4501)
XCS VFD (IC4501)
AD DT
6
PB CK
ATF ERR
AD DT
6
PB CK
REC CK
REC DT
40
42
(4-42)
IC3103
(TRW)
REC/PB
AMP
15
20
13
(4-41)
IC3101
(TRF)
EQ
A/D CONV.
PLL
34
42
PB Y OUT
27
25
22 24
31
4
35
XCS TRF
(IC4501)
2
2
1
6
7
IC3102
(4-41)
SWP
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-2)
CAIN Y
CAIN C
DATA TO SFD
DATA FROM SFD
SFD BCK
Y
C
55
59
67
BW Y
RF MON
SWP
9
16
CN1011(1/2)
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
DRUM
ODD
FLYING
ERASE
ODD
EVEN
Q3123
Q3111,3116
FLYING
ERASE
OSC
CN3101
5
4
7
8
11
EVEN
(SEE PAGE
4-30)
XFE ON
SWP
DV RF SWP
ATF ERR
ERRV,TRRV,TRRT
DRP SO,XDRP SCK
MC BUS
TO
OVERALL BLOCK
(3/5)
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
XCS OSD
OSD SO
XOSD SCK
HI SO, XHI SCK
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK
(4/5)
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
BL CONT
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(5/5)
(PD-131)
(SEE PAGE
3-9)
5
10
3
4
9
11
XCS LCD
(IC4803)
HI SO, XHI SCK
16
7
8
17
PANEL XHD,XVD
BL CONT
CN1003
ADJUSTMENT
VOLTAGE
(4-36)
IC1601
D/A CONV.
(EVR)
27
28
15
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCK
DA STB(IC4902)
BW Y
CN1006
3
VF-129 BOARD
Q902
H OUT
T901,902
3
4
CN902
DH1,DH2
5
HV
G2
2
3
W901
H
DV1,DV2
1
2
CN902
DY
H V
V901
CRT
3
EVF Y
11
16
5 3
CRT DRIVE
13
IC901
(4-25)
G1
1
W901
3-3 3-4
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/5)
VC-256 BOARD(3/4)
DRP SO,DRP SI,XDRP SCK
MC BUS
FRRV,TRRT,TRRV
ATF ERR
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(2/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-4)
2 3 4
IC4502
EEPROM
1
(4-50)
DV RF SWP
XFE ON
SWP
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX
VSP SO,VSP SI,XVSP SCK
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
XCS VFD (IC3301)
XCS SFD (IC3301)
XCS TAKO (IC3701)
XCS EEP
XCS AU (IC5401)
XCS TRF (IC3101)
VREF (IC3301)
XCS MECHA (IC4803)
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCX
81
82
83
1
17
38
18
88
21
23
112
62
59
60
72
106
107
108
95
74
75
76
26
78
79
80
37
X4901
20MHz
LINE OUT V (IC3301)
(4-50)
IC4501
DIGITAL8
MECHA
CONTROL
SIGNAL
PROCESS
CONTROL
2
1
114
(4-48)
IC4902
CAMERA
CONTROL
68
DRUM PWM
CAP PWM
69
116
117
115
110
109
96
39
40
41
49
50
DRUM FG
DRUM PG
CAP FG
DEW AD
MODE SW A-C
LOAD
UNLOAD
TAPE END
54
53
114
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
113
TAPE TOP
TAPE LED ON
55
44
REC PROOF
DRUM PWM
28
CAP PWM
25
(4-52)
IC4401
(3/3)
LPF
29
DRUM ERROR
27
CAP ERROR
15
11
IC1301
(1/2)
PWM
DRIVE
(4-59)
58
64
2 3 4
IC4901
EEPROM
1
(4-47)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-2)
IFI OE
IFI VD
XCS CH,CH SO,XCH SCK
VC SO,VC SI,XVC SCX
XCS KINUTA (IC2201)
DA STRB (IC1601)
78
79
80
19
21
XCS EEPROM
27
111
113
83
82
81
115
CAP FG
71
V LIGHT PWM
IRIS PWM
HALL AD
FC RST
ZM RST
LENS FILTER ON SW
PITCH AD
YAW AD
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCX
XCS VC (IC4803)
IRIS PWM
74
75
76
78
70
87
23
24
43
38
ME SW
40
HI8 MP SW
ZM RST
FC RST
LENS FILTER ON SW
84
97
98
HALL AD
PITCH AD
YAW AD
16
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(4/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-8)
HI SO,HI SI,XHI SCK
XCC DOWN
ZOOM VR AD
3-5
Q1306
SWITCHING
SWITCHING
Q1305
DRUM VS
6
(4-52)
IC4401
(1/3)
DRUM
MOTOR
DRIVE
61
59
57
DRUM FG
16
DRUM PG
22
CAP VS
3
FG AMP
PG AMP
(4-52)
IC4402
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
DRIVE
17
20
CAP FG
24 FG AMP
21
22
23
5
7
9
16
CN4402
10
U, V, W
5
CN4403
U,V,W
14
HU1,2
HV1,2
HW1,2
9
7
2
FG1,2
DEW AD
18
16
22
MODE SW A-C
21
19
3
1
M2000 MECHA DECK
(SEE PAGE 4-30)
M901
DRUM MOTOR
M
DRUM FG
DRUM PG
M902
CAPSTAN MOTOR
M
HU,HV,HW
CAPSTAN FG
DEW SENSOR
S901
MODE SWITCH
LOAD
UNLOAD 55
56
TAPE END
47
TAPE TOP
44
T REEL FG
41
S REEL FG
33
(4-52)
IC4401
(2/3)
LOADING
MOTOR
DRIVE
53
51
TAPE END
DETECT
TAPE TOP
DETECT
46
45
T REEL
FG AMP
S REEL
FG AMP
38
39
36
35
CN4401
2
LM(+),LM(-)
1
TAPE END(C)
14
TAPE TOP(C)
15
T REEL(+),(-)
7
6
S REEL(+),(-) 9
10
M903
LOADING MOTOR
M
Q002
TAPE END
SENSOR
Q001
TAPE TOP
SENSOR
T REEL
SENSOR
H001
S REEL
SENSOR
H002
D001
TAPE
LED
TAPE LED ON
Q4401
LED DRIVE 13
REC PROOF
ME SW
HI8 MP SW
XCC DOWN
CN4404
3
4
2
1
S001
S002
REC PROOF
ME/MP
HI8 MP
C.C. LOCK
Q1001,1002
VIDEO
LIGHT
DRIVE
VL UNREG
3-6
VIDEO LIGHT
CN1001
19
20
FP-258
(FLEXIBLE)
(3/3)
(SEE PAGE 4-55)
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/5)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF-1000)(2/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
VC-256 BOARD(4/4)
(4-46)
IC4803
HI CONTROL
L901
EL
(BACK LIGHT)
LCD902
LCD
INDICATOR
S007
DIAL A
DIAL B
SEL/PUSH
EXEC
DIAL
MENU EXEC
SUPER NIGHT SHOT
SW
PANEL
OPEN/CLOSE
SW
6
5
2
1
CN004
4
5
(4-28)
IC003
EL
BACK LIGHT
DRIVE
1
2
10
1
CN003
11
16 30
(4-27)
IC001
INDICATOR
DRIVE
7
10
4
CN002
1
CN009
FUNCTION
SW
Q002,003
S001
RESET
BT001
LITHIUM
BATTERY
CN001
18
17
24
23
22
19
6
8
6
16
20
5
9
5
20
19
16
1
2
3
7
8
CN1007
KEY AD2-KEY AD4
KEY AD0, KEY AD1
LI 3V
VTR UNREG
BATT UNREG
(4-45)
IC4801
RESET
X4801
20MHz
X4802
32.768kHz
5
3
7
VDD SWITCH
6
XOSD SCK
OSD SO
LCD COM/XDATA
XCS LCD DRIVER
67
68
DIAL A
DIAL B
93
KEY AD0
97
KEY AD4
40 20MHz OUT
41
52
20MHz IN
32kHz IN
53
32kHz OUT
38 XRESET
42
51
77
87
VDD
XCS MECHA
XCS VC
80
3
XCS LCD
27
XCC DOWN 18
XCS MECHA (IC4501)
XCS VC (IC4902)
XCS LCD (IC5501, 5502)
HI SO 33
HI SI
HI SCK
34
35
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK
SIRCS SIG
4
78
LCD LED ON
24
60
LCD COM/XDATA
XCS LCD DRIVER
46
45
XOSD SCK
OSD SO
44 XCS OSD
SIRCS ENV
MELODY
59
36
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
28
29
BATT/EXT SW
FAST CHARGE
INIT CHARGE ON
66
50
25
Q4806, 4805
MOD
S001
PANEL
REVERSE
SW
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK (PR-10000)
(SEE PAGE 4-19)
1
2
CN5702
KEY AD5
PD-131 BOARD(1/2)
CN5701
2 2
CN1003
Q4804
I/F
98 KEY AD5
1
2
LANC IN
LANC OUT
48
79
IB SI
IB SO
19
XPHOTO FREEZ
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(SS-1000)
(SEE PAGE 4-45)
START/STOP
SW
POWER
SW
XS/S SW
XVTR MODE SW
XCAM MODE SW
2
1
4
CN009
16 XS/S SW
14
15
XVTR MODE SW
XCAM MODE SW
16
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(FK-1000)
(SEE PAGE 4-56)
EJECT SW
ZOOM VR
PHOTO SW
VTR FUNCTION
SW
XEJECT SW
11
ZOOM VR AD
1
XPHOTO FREEZE
KEY AD0
KEY AD1
4
CN1011(2/2)
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
4
6
7
5
CN1008
LANC IN
LANC OUT
17 XEJECT SW
BATT SIG
BL REG
D 1.9V
D 2.8V
AU 2.8V
A 2.8V
A 4.75V
AU 4.75V
RP 4.75V
MT 4.75V
B/W EVF 4.75V
EVF 2.8V
RP 2.8V
EVF PANEL 4.75V
PANEL -15.3V
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
D 1.5V
RP 6.0V
(2/2)
IC1301
DC/DC
CONV.
XCC DOWN
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK
ZOOM VR AD
SIRCS SIG
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(3/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-5)
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(1/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-2)
SIRCS, PWM
XCS OSD
OSD SO
XOSD SCK
HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK
BL CONT
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK(2/5)
(SEE PAGE
3-4)
(4-59)
BATT UNREG
Q702
CHARGE
SW
Q701
CN701
6
2
3
4
7
5
BT901
DC IN
+
S
–
BATTERY
TERMINAL
FAST CHARGE
BATT/EXT SW
BATT SIG
INIT CHARGE ON
3-7 3-8
3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (5/5)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
PD-131 BOARD(2/2)
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
XCS LCD
10
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK
(2/5)
(VC-256)
(SEE PAGE
3-3)
HI SO,XHI SCK
9
11
PANEL XHD
PANEL XVD
7
8
3
4
5
44
46
45
42
1
48
41
40
39
48
47
46
IC5501
RGB
DRIVE
(4-19)
IC5502
TIMING
GENERATOR
2
(4-19)
8
5
13
24
4
R5522
1.5k
20
22
24
VR,VG,VB
27
COM
35
DA
Q5601
PANEL ID
HD OUT
PANEL COM
VR,VG,VB
19
20
21
VCOM
11
6
8
4
5
3
1
CN5502
FOR
ADJUSTMENTS
LCD901
2.5 INCH
LCD UNIT
5
10
15
CN5501
18
ND901
BACKLIGHT
BL HIGH
10
BL LOW
CN5601
3
T5601
Q5602
INVERTER
BACK
LIGHT
DRIVE
BL REG
3
(4-21)
IC5602
CURRENT
DET
4
HD OUT
BL DET
5 2
(4-21)
IC5601
BL CONT
17
CN5701
1
7
6 PANEL 2.8V
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-9 3-10
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-256 BOARD
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
DC PACK SW
BATT SIG
BATT/EXT SW
BATT UNREG
4
CN701
DC PACK SW
1
BATT SIG
7
BATT GND
5 Q701
Q702-704
CHARGE
CONTROL
INIT CHARGE ON
F001
FAST CHARGE
DC IN
BATT/EXT
3
ACV UNREG
6
ACV GND
2
F004
F005
F003
F002
BL REG UNREG
L701
C/D VSD1.5V
VTR UNREG
Q1310-1311
4.75V REG
28 VCC
(4-59)
IC1301
(1/2)
DC/DC CONVERTER
OUTPUT-1
MOS GATE-1
45
42
OUTPUT MONITOR-1 40
22 CT
21 RT
OUTPUT-4
MOS GATE-4
57
54
OUTPUT MONITOR-4 18
OUTPUT VCC 7 5
OUTPUT VCC 1,2,3 49
COMP 41
OUTPUT-3 50
Q1304
SWITCHING L1302
Q1307
SWITCHING
Q1303
SWITCHING
L1305 L1310
Q1308
SWITCHING
Q1301
SWITCHING
4
1
T1301
2
3
7
8
5
6
D1302
D1306
L1306
L1307
L1308
L1309
L1324
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
AU 2.8V
EVF 2.8V
RP 2.8V
D1301
RECT
Q1314
EMERGENCY
DETECT
OUTPUT MONITOR-3
34
PD-131 BOARD
(4-19)
IC5501
LCD
DRIVE
15
14
16
PANEL 13.3V
PANEL 4.75V
PANEL -15.3V
13
PANEL 2.8V
(4-19)
IC5502
TIMING
GENERATOR
18
17
BL REG
BL CONT
CN5701
BACK
LIGHT
DRIVE
IC5601
IC5602
(4-21)
LCD901
VGH
VSH
VGL
1
24
3
VDD
CN5501
23
LCD
PANEL
BL HIGH
CN5601
10
ND901
BACK
LIGHT
OUTPUT-2 46
OUTPUT MONITOR-2 37
OUTPUT-7 2
OUTPUT MONITOR-7 6
MONITOR INPUT-7 7
STANDBY-3 29
STANDBY 30
STANDBY-7 31
VREF 27
DRUM/CAPSTAN
PWM DRIVE
OUTPUT VCC 4,5,6 1
Q1302
SWITCHING
L1301
Q1309
SWITCHING
L1317 L1318
BL REG
L1312
L1313
L1314
L1316
EVF PANEL 4.75V
AU 4.75V
A 4.75V
RP 4.75V
SERVO BLOCK
Q1305,1306
DRUM VS
CAP VS
SWITCHING
BL CONT
16
+1.5V REG
IC1304
(4-60)
Q1331,1332
Q1321,1323,1327
+12V REG
Q1322,1324
-15.3V REG
Q1315,1316
-6.5V REG
PANEL -15.3V
2
5
(4-60)
IC1303
6V REG
3
FB1301
PANEL 13.3V
3-11 3-12
BATT SIG
BATT/XEXT SW
FAST CHARGE
DC PACK SW
INIT CHARGE ON
BATT UNREG
VL UNREG
MT 4.75V
VTR UNREG
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 1.9V
D 1.5V
EVF PANEL 4.75V
AU 4.75V
A 4.75V
RP 4.75V
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
CAM -6.5V
POWER(2/2)
(SEE PAGE
3-13)
CAM 12V
RP 2.8V
RP 6.0V
PANEL 2.8V
13
PANEL 4.75V
PANEL 13.3V
14
15
PANEL -15.3V
BL CONT
16
17
BL REG
CN1003
18
3-7. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
VC-256 BOARD
16
BATT SIG
BATT/XEXT SW
FAST CHARGE
DC PACK SW
INIT CHARGE ON
BATT UNREG
VL UNREG
MT 4.75V
VTR UNREG
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 1.9V
D 1.5V
POWER(1)
(SEE PAGE
3-12)
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
RP 2.8V
RP 6.0V
EVF PANEL 4.75V
AU 4.75V
A 4.75V
RP4.75V
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
CN1009
1
2
XCAM+STBY SW
XVTR MODE SW
S001
POWER
CAMERA
OFF (CHARGE)
VCR/PLAYER
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK (SS-1000)
(SEE PAGE 4-49 )
D4801
7 V IN
3 V BATT
V OUT
RESET
VRO
CS
8
4
6
5
EVER 3.0V
IC4801
(4-45)
INITIAL RESET, BACKUP VCC
(4-45)
2
IC4804
CHARGER
3
D4806
(4-52)
IC4402
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
DRIVE
R4411,4455
CN4404
12 8
R4407
(4-44)
IC3701
VIDEO
OUT
AMP
(4-36)
IC1601
D/A
CONV.
(EVR)
(4-39)
IC3302
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
(4-33)
IC2201
CAMERA PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM MOTOR
CONTROL
VL UNREG
MT 4.75V
D 2.8V
A 2.8V
AU 2.8V
D 1.9V
D 1.5V
CAM -6.5V
CAM 12V
EVF PANEL 4.75V
AU 4.75V
A 4.75V
RP 2.8V
RP 6.0V
RP 4.75V
VTR UNREG
CN4403
17
(4-48)
IC4902
CAMERA
CONTROL
V LIGHT PWM 71
(4-47)
IC4901
EEPROM
L3103
DRUM MOTOR
DRIVE,
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE,
SENSOR AMP
IC4401
(4-52)
IC3103
(TRW)
REC/PB
AMP
(4-42)
Q4804
I/F
RF 1.9V
L3102
(4-46)
IC4803
MODE CONTROL
14 XVTR MODE SW
15 XCAM+STBY SW
51
77
86
87
90 BATT SENS
91 ACV SENS
42
VDD
38 RESET
61 BATT IN
48 IB SI
49 IB SO
CAM DD ON
VTR DD ON
DC PACK SW
FAST CHARGE
BATT/EXT
28
29
47
50
66
INIT CHARGE ON 25
EVF DD ON 10
(4-32)
IC1502
S/H.AGC.
A/D CONV.
(4-32)
IC1501
TIMING
GENERATOR
IC3101
(TRF)
EQ
A/D CONV.
PLL
(4-41)
FB3303
(4-37)
IC3301
(CAIN)
DV
SIGNAL
PROCESS
IC5402
AUDIO
ADC&DAC
(4-54)
(4-54)
IC5401
AUDIO
OUTPUT
SPEAKER
AMP
R1554
(4-40)
IC3303
(LIP)
DV
INTERFACE
CN1551
24 15
ZOOM
LENS
T REEL,
S REEL,
SENSOR
H001
H002
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
M902
M2000-MECHA
(SEE PAGE 4-30)
(4-35)
IC1552
IRIS DRIVE
HALL AMP
(4-35)
IC1551
FOCUS/ZOOM
MOTOR DRIVE
(4-50)
IC4502
EEPROM
(4-50)
IC4501
MECHA
CONTROL
CN1501
10 12
CN191
5 3
CCD
IMAGER
CD-281 BOARD
IC191
(4-8)
R1004
CN1007
6 19
CN001
LI-3V
CN1008
2
6
8
20 5
XHI RESET
S001
RESET
CN1002
14 14
A 2.8V
VL UNREG
9 16
VTR UNREG
10 15
D 2.8V
11 14
EVER 3.0V
Q1001,1002
V LIGHT PWM
VIDEO
LIGHT
DRIVE
CN1001
20 19
VL UNREG
D 2.8V
13 13
AU 2.8V
12 12
A 4.75V
5 5
VTR UNREG
CN753
ZOOM VR
SWITCH
LED
D3901,3902
LASER LINK
LED
(TRV130)
MI-041 BOARD
FP-258
(FLEXIBLE)
(SEE PAGE 4-55)
BT001
LITHIUM
BATTERY
LCD LED ON
Q002,003
IC752
MIC AMP
(4-11)
IC001
LCD INDICATOR
DRIVE
(4-27)
(4-28)
IC003
EL BACK LIGHT
DRIVE
SWITCH
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK (FK-1000)
(SEE PAGE 4-60 )
IC753
PITCH, YAW
SENSOR AMP
(4-11)
(4-11)
IC751
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
EVF PANEL 4.75V
EVF DD ON
Q1317,1319
(SEE PAGE 4- 27)
(4-13)
IC3901
IR
TRANSMITTER
VF-129 BOARD
BW EVF 4.75V
1
CN901
IC901
(4-25)
1
CN1006
CRT
DRIVE
SE751,752
PITCH, YAW
SENSOR
(TRV130)
VIDEO LIGHT
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
3-13 3-14E
I
C
M2000 MECHANISM
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
FP-300
FLEXIBLE
FP-301
FLEXIBLE
TAPE END
FG
PG
M901
DRUM
MOTOR
FE
SP1
VIDEO
HEAD
SP2
Q001
TAPE TOP
LS-057 BOARD
S001
ME/MP
REC PROOF
Hi8 MP
S002
C.C.LOCK
H001,002
S-REEL SENSOR
T-REEL SENSOR
FP-302
FLEXIBLE
Q002
TAPE END
M
FP-228
FLEXIBLE
DEW
SENSOR
FG
M
M902
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
FP-229
FLEXIBLE
MR
SENSOR
S901
MODE
SWITCH
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
M
Coil-V
Coil-U
Coil-U
GND(COM)
Vo2
Vcc
Vo1
C
B
A
DEW
VH-
Hu1
VH+
Coil-W
Coil-W coil-V
Hw2
Hw1
Hv2
Hv1
Hu2
C_LOCK_SW
HI8_MP
REC_PROOF
ME/MP
HALL_COM
T_REEL(-)
T_REEL(+)
SENSOR_VCC
S_REEL(+)
S_REEL(-)
REG_GND
TAPE_LED(A)
TAPE_LED(K)
TAPE_END(C)
TAPE_TOP(C)
PG
FG-PG_COM
FG
COM
W
W
V
V
U
U
GND
GND
GND
SP1(X)
SP1(Y)
GND
SP2(X)
SP2(Y)
GND
FE(Y)
FE(X)
1
2
LM(-)
LM(+)
CN4401 2P
8
9
6
7
10
3
4
1
2
5
V
U
W
W
V
PG
FG-PG_COM
FG
COM
CN4402
U
10P
10
11
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
CN3101
GND
GND
GND
XODD(SP1X)
11P
YODD(SP1Y)
GND
XEVEN(SP2X)
YEVEN(SP2Y)
GND
FE(Y)
FE(X)
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
7
8
11
1
4
5
2
3
6
17
18
19
20
21
22
VH-
Hw2
Hw1
Hv2
Hv1
Hu2
Hu1
VH+
CAP_V
CAP_V
CAP_W
CAP_W
CAP_U
CAP_U
REG_GND
FG2
FG VCC
FG1
M-SW(C)
M-SW(B)
M-SW(A)
DEW
CN4403 22P
13
14
15
10
11
8
9
12
5
6
3
4
7
1
2
CN4404
C_LOCK_SW
HI8_MP
REC_PROOF
ME/MP
HALL_COM
T_REEL(-)
T_REEL(+)
SENSOR_VCC
S_REEL(+)
S_REEL(-)
REG_GND
TAPE_LED(A)
TAPE_LED(K)
TAPE_END(C)
TAPE_TOP(C)
15P
J201
S VIDEO
OUT
A/V OUT
VIDEO
LIGHT
VC-256 BOARD(1/2)
1/15 CAMERA PROCESS
2/15 CAMERA Y/C PROCESS
3/15 FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE,EVR
4/15 DV SIGNAL RPOCESS
5/15 DV INTERFACE
6/15 DIGITAL REC/PB AMP
7/15 VIDEO OUT
8/15 HI CONTROL
9/15 CAMERA MECHA CONTROL
10/15 MECHANISM CONTROL
11/15 DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE
12/15 AUDIO PROCESS
13/15 DC IN,CHARGE
14/15 CONNECTOR
15/15 DC/DC CONVERTER
FP-258
FLEXIBLE
4
3
2
1
TPA
NTPA
TPB
NTPB
CN201 4P
DV IN/OUT
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
7
8
11
17
18
19
20
1
4
5
2
3
6
REG_GND
NC
NC
RF_IN
RF_SWP
TMW
TCK
TDO
TDI
CN1011
VCO
XLANC_POWER_ON
EVF_BL
LANC_IN
EVF_BL_4.75V
LANC_OUT
EVF_VG
NC
RF_MON
REG_GND
REG_GND
20P
FP-263
FLEXIBLE
MI-041 BOARD
1/2 STEADY SHOT,MIC AMP
2/2 IR
IC3901
SIRCS
D3903
IR
SE752
YAW
SENSOR
SE751
PITCH
SENSOR
CN751
2P
INT_MIC_L
MIC_GND
1
2
CN752 2P
INT_MIC_R
MIC_GND
1
2
MIC
MIC901
INT_MIC_L
MIC
MIC901
INT_MIC_R
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
LENS UNIT
B
9
CCD
IMAGER
10
CD-281 BOARD
11 12 13 14 15
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-1000)
RV001
S001-011
ZOOM
W-T
S012
EJECT/
STOP/
PLAY/
LIGHT/PHOTO(PHOTO FREEZE)
PAUSE/
REC
FF / REW/
D001
SUPER
LASER
LINK
16 17 18
FP-259
FLEXIBLE
TO FH(2/2)
M
16
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
4-1 4-2
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
1
2 3
A
4 5 6
D901
EL
LCD 902
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ND901
BACK LIGHT
LCD901
2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
B
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
(CF-1000)
C
D
J001
(HEADPHONES)
E
SP901
SPEAKER
S901
(OPEN/CLOSE)
1
2
1
2
CN003
SP(+)
SP(-)
CN009
OPEN/CLOSE
GND
2P
2P
F
G
TO FH(1/2)
H
I
VC-256 BOARD(2/2)
S001-004,006,009
012,013,015,016,018,019,
022
RESET/MENU/TIME/EXPOSURE/
SUPER NIGHT SHOT/END SEARCH/
DISPLAY/VOLUME+/ZOOM PB/
VOLUME-/BACK LIGHT/FOCUS/
FADER
+
BT001
LITHIUM BATTERY
S007
SEL/PUSH EXEC
FFC-295
FLAT CABLE
J
PD-131 BOARD
1/2 RGB,TIMING GENERATOR
2/2 BACK LIGHT
PD-110
HARNESS
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
CN5502
VB
XVD_OUT
VG
PANEL_COM
VR
PANEL_ID
C-SYNC/XHD
XHD_OUT
GND
GND
10P
CN5702
6P
PANEL_REV
PANEL_REV
N.C.
N.C.
GND
GND
4
5
6
1
2
3
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
(PR-10000)
S001
(PANEL REVERSE)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(SS-1000)
S001
(TRV130)
VCR
S002
(TRV130E)
PLAYER
OFF(CHARGE)
CAMERA
START/STOP
POWER
VF-129 BOARD
CN1006 4P
XTALLY_LED
BW_EVF_Y
EVF_GND
EVF_BL/BW_EVF_4.75V
4
3
2
1
FFC-256
FLAT CABLE
3
4
1
2
EVF_4.6V
EVF_GND
BW_EVF_Y
XTALLY_LED
CN901 4P
W901 5P
FTB
G1
H
H
N.C.
G2
3
4
1
2
5
CN902 4P
DV1
DV2
DH1
DH2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
CN1009
XCAM+STBY_SW
XVTR_MODE_SW
REG_GND
XS/S_SW
REG_GND
5P
CN701 7P
DCPACK_SW
ACV_GND
BATT/XEXT
BATT_UNREG
BATT_GND
ACV_UNREG
BATT_SIG
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
DP-77
HARNESS
DC IN
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
V901
CRT
K
16
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
4-3 4-4
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards)
• b
: Pattern from the side which enables seeing.
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.)
• Through hole is omitted.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
• Chip parts.
Transistor Diode
C 6 5 4 4 5 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3
(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms.
*
(VOM of DC 10 M
Ω
input impedance is used.).
• Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.) *
1. Connection
Pattern box
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in mF unless otherwise noted. pF : m mF. 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted.
kW=1000W, MW=1000kW.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541
22U
TA A
L452
10UH
2520
1.5 m
Front of the lens
Kinds of capacitor
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted.
• Signal name
XEDIT
→
EDIT PB/XREC
→
PB/REC
•
2
: non flammable resistor
•
1
: fusible resistor
•
C
: panel designation
•
A
: B+ Line
*
•
B
: B– Line *
•
J
: IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
•
C
: adjustment for repair.
*
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
*
* Indicated by the color red.
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
H
A B A=B B A
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Electron beam scanned frame
CRT picture frame
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include the board name.
4-5
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
CD-281 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
— Ref. No. CD-281 Board; 1,000 Series —
For printed wiring board
• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location.
• CD-281 board consists of multiple layers. However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
Transistor
C
B E
There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
CCD IMAGER
CD-281
4-7
1
2 3
A
B
C
CD-281 BOARD
CCD IMAGER
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
TO
VC-256 BOARD(1/15)
CN1501
THROUGH
THE FP-259
FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-31)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
CN191 14P
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
14
13
12
11
10
CAM_-7.5V
VSHT
CAM_12V
GND
CCD OUT
GND
RG
H1
H2
GND
V4
V3
V2
V1
C196
47u
10V
R194
0
R195
XX
4
1
5
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5
4
IC191
CCD IMAGER
3
6
IC191
ICX089AK-43
ICX091KA-43
:TRV130
:TRV130E
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
D
E
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y
REC
PB
Y/CHROMA
L191
100uH
R191
0
1608
R192
0
R198
0
C197
0.1u
B
C193
XX
B
C195
0.1u
F
C191
22u
16V
R8.5/P0
R193
3.3k
1608
Q191
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
R9.2/P0
6
C194
XX
LND191
F
G
H
16
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
• The CD-281 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts nor exposed to strong light.
4-8
MI-041 (STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
— Ref. No. MI-041 Board; 20,000 Series —
4-9
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
For printed wiring board
• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location.
• MI-041 board consists of multiple layers. However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
Transistor
C
B E
There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
4-10
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE
MI-041
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-9 for printed wiring board.
1
2
I
A
B
C
D D754
MA111-(K8).S0
LND751
SEIDEN
MIC901
CN752 2P
MIC
INT_MIC_R
GND
1
2
E
MIC902
CN751
2P
MIC
INT_MIC_L
GND
1
2
F
G
H
MI-041 BOARD(1/2)
STEADY SHOT,MIC AMP
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
D752
MA111-(K8)SO.
IC751
REMOTE COMMANDER
RECEIVER
IC751
PNA4S13MO2SO
RS-180-T
:TRV130
:TRV130E
2
3
3
1
4
D756
XX
4 5
R761
2.2k
C809
47u
6.3V
6 7 8
C810
XX
C762
22u
6.3V
C772
0.056u
25V
B
C777
0.056u
25V
B
C784
22u
6.3V
R782
10k
R783
1M
R785
15k
C789
0.33u
16V
B
2012
SE751
PITCH
SENSOR
2
Vref
3
GND
Vcc
1 out
4
C763
0.1u
10V
B
RB751
22k
C768
0.056u
25V
B
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SE752
YAW
SENSOR
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
Vcc out
4
Vref
2
GND
3
RB752
22k
C759
0.1u
10V
B
IC753
SENSOR AMP
C774
0.056u
25V
B
C775
22u
6.3V
R780
10k
R779
1M
R784
XX
C787
XX
B
2012
C758
22u
6.3V
IC753
*
C808
10u
6.3V
C770
0.047u
B
C791
0.01u
16V
B
R757
2200
C764
0.01u
B
1005
R767
5.6k
C776
0.1u
B
R766
5.6k
R769
6.8k
R775
4.7k
C781
0.015u
B
R776
0
C782
0.015u
B
R774
18k
C785
0.022u
B
R788
33k
C788
0.022u
B
2.8
C794
10u
6.3V
IC753
NJM3230V(TE2)
UPC6756GR-8JG-E2
:TRV130
:TRV130E
L751
10uH
±
10%
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
C799
0.22u
B
C800
10u
6.3V
C796
XX
B
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y
REC
PB
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
C761
0.01u
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R786
0
R771
0
C783
0.022u
R770
18k
C779
0.01u
B
R789
33k
B
R772
4.7k
C780
0.015u
B
IC752
MIC AMP
STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP
MI-041 (1/2)
16
4-11
9 10 11 12
R797
1800
D753
TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
(TALLY)
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
CN753
24
24P
XF_TALLY_LED
23
22
21
20
MIC_R
REG_GND
MIC_L
SE_GND
YAW_AD
PITCH_AD
VST_C_RESET
XSIRCS_SIG
XWIND_ON/SIRCS_PWM
A_2.8V
AU_2.8V
A_4.75V
IR_ON
IR_A_DEV
IR_V_DEV
IR_CARR
IR_L_OUT
IR_R_OUT
VTR_UNREG
IR_VIDEO
REG_GND
REG_GND
IR_FSC
TO
VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
CN1002
(
THROUGH THE FP-263
FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-55)
)
VTR_UNREG
A_4.75V
REG_GND
IR_FSC
IR_VIDEO
IR_R
IR_L
IR_CARR
IR_V_DEV
IR_A_DEV
SIRCS_PWM
IR_ON
TO(2/2)
4-12
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-9 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-65 for waveforms.
1
2
A
MI-041 BOARD(2/2)
IR DRIVE
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
VTR_UNREG
B
C
A_4.75V
REG_GND
(TRV 130)
IR_CARR
IR_V_DEV
IR_A_DEV
3
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
L3906
10uH
R3924
0
2012
200mA
R3901
33k
R3930
XX
R3931
12k
R3902
4700
R3903
33k
R3904
12k
C3904
0.01u
16V
B
1005
C3909
0.01u
B
1005
4 5 6
NO MARK:IR ON/IR OFF MODE
( ) :IR ON MODE
[ ] :IR OFF MODE
R3927
*
2012
L3902
10uH
C3912
10u
6.3V
C3911
0.01u
B
1005
C3910
4.7u
6.3V
TA A
C3914
0.01u
B
1005
C3913
510p
CH
R3908
330
R3909
1k
L3903
5.6u
2520
C3918
8p
CH
R3912
680
L3904
33uH
2520
C3917
0.1u
B
1005
C3921
33p
CH
C3923
39p
CH
L3905
33uH
2520
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
7
D
E
F
G
16
TO(1/2)
IR_VIDEO
IR_L
IR_R
IR_FSC
SIRCS_PWM
IR_ON
C3907
1u
B
RB3901
5.6k
C3901
1u
B
1608
C3902
XX
4V
TA
A
C3905
0.47u
B
C3906
0.47u
B
C3903
XX
6.3V
TA
A
R3905
1M
C3908
1u
B
0
2.4
0
0.3
0.2
0
0
0
CLAMP C1
NC
V DEV ADJ
NC
V IN
REG
NC
REF
A DEV ADJ
Lch IN
ALC C
Rch IN
3
IC3901
IR TRANSMITTER
IC3901
AN2920FHQ
1
2
DRV CL OUT
NC
DRV EM OUT
DRV SW
MIX OUT
NC
MIX IN
NC
VRF OUT
ARF OUT
STBY
CHUP C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4.7
R3907
22k
±
0.5%
R3945
XX
1608
R3913
150k
C3915
0.01u
B
1005
R3914
150k
C3916
1u
B
C3919
0.47u
B
C3920
0.47u
B
C3922
1u
B
C3924
1u
B
8
R3919
1500
9
C3932
4.7u
16V
C3933
0.1u
B
1005
10
D3901
CL310IRS
(LASER LINK)
D3902
DCS2815
(LASER LINK)
4.7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R3915
560
R3917
470
C3926
0.01u
B
1005
R3916
6800
C3935
0.01u
B
C3925
0.1u
B
1005
R3946
39k
(3.8)/
[4.5]
Q3901
2SA1774HT2
LED DRIVE
(4.5)/
[0]
R3921
470
Q3902
2SA1037AK
LED DRIVE
C3929
22u
4V
TA
A
C3930
0.01u
B
1005
C3931
0.01u
B
1005
(0.6)/
[0]
R3920
470
(1.2)/
[0]
R3922
0
Q3903
2SD1664-T1
LED DRIVE
(1.2)/
[0]
R3929
*
1/10W
2012
R3925
*
1/10W
2012
(5.3)/
[6.4]
(0.6)/
[0]
R3923
*
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y
PB
*MARKED:MOUNT TABLE
TRV130
C3934 0.1u
D3903
Q3904
R3923
R3925
XX
XX
XX
10
R3926
R3927
R3929
R3948
18
XX
XX
XX
Y/CHROMA
TRV130E
XX
CL-310IRS-X-TU
2SC4617HT2L
470
120
XX
0
120
0
AUDIO
SIGNAL
11
C3934
*
B
1005
R3926
*
12
D3903
*
(IR)
(NIGHT SHOT)
R3948
*
Q3904
*
LED DRIVE
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-13 4-14
IR DRIVE
MI-041 (2/2)
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
PD-131 (RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
— Ref. No. PD-131 Board; 30,000 Series —
For printed wiring board
• Refer to page 4-69 for parts location.
• PD-131 board consists of multiple layers. However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
Transistor
C 6 5 4 1 2
B E 1 2 3 5 4 3
There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
CD-281
(CCD IMAGER)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
PD-131
RGB, BACK LIGHT,
TIMING GENERATOR
MI-041
(STEADY SHOT, MIC AMP, IR DRIVE)
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT
PD-131
4-15 4-16
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-17 4-18
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT
PD-131
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-15 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-65 for waveforms.
1
2 3
A
PD-131 BOARD(1/2)
RGB,TIMING GENERATOR
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
B
C
D
E
F
TO
VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
CN1003
(SEE PAGE 4-56)
CN5701
20P
SE_GND
BL_GND
XVC_SCK
XCS_LCD_DA
VC_SO
PANEL_XVD
C-SYNC/XHD
PANEL_HOLD
20
19
BL_REG 18
17
BL_CONT
PANEL_-15.3V
PANEL_13.3V
PANEL_4.75V
PANEL_2.8V
REG_GND
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PANEL_B
PANEL_G
PANEL_R
AD5
XSYS_RST
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
R5702
10k
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
(PR-10000)
S001
(PANEL REVERSE)
CN5702
6P
PANEL_REV
PANEL_REV
N.C.
N.C.
GND
GND
3
4
1
2
5
6
G
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PR-10000) is replaced as a block so the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
H
I
J
K
L
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
FB5502 0uH
L5502
10uH
C5527
0.01u
B 1005
C5509
3.3u
50V
C5510
0.01u
B
1005
C5513
0.1u
B
1005
C5514
22u
6.3V
TA
R5531
XX
R5505
15k
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
DAC
REG_GND
SE_GND
BL_GND
BL_REG
BL_CONT
1
TO(2/2)
XVC_SCK
XCS_PANEL
XVC_SO
XVD
SYNC
HOLD
L5501
10uH
C5501
10u
4V
TA
C5503
0.1u
B
R5502
XX
R5523
0
C5526
XX
1005
R5503
100k
±
0.5%
R5524
XX
C5525
XX
C5505
C5506
C5507
0.01u
0.01u
0.01u
XSYS_RST
R5703
XX
XC.SAVE
XVC_SCK
XTG_SO
XCS_PANEL
R5501
470k
2.8
2.8
2.8
1.1
XP.SAVE
2.8
1.8
1.9
1.8
1.6
2.8
2.5
2.7
EXT_DA2
XC.SAVE
XSCK
SI
XCS
Vcc1
TRAP_ADJ
LPF_ADJ
XP.SAVE
B_IN
G_IN
R_IN
1
3
2
IC5501
LCD DRIVER
IC5501
RB5P003AM1
5
6
VB
B_DC_DET
VG
G_DC_DET
4 VR
R_DC_DET
GND2
GND1
VSH
Vcc4
N.C
N.C
2.3
1.7
2.3
1.7
2.3
1.7
4.7
13.6
FB5501
OuH
C5502
XX
16V
C5504
0.1u
B
1005
B
C5517
0.1u
1608
B
C5518
0.1u
1608
C5519
0.1u
B
1608
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
R5506
2700
R5507
47k
R5508
68k
R5509
22k
C5512
0.1u
B
1005
R5511
1M
R5513
XX
R5512
100k
C5515
0.001u
SL
L5503
27uH
±
5%
D5502
1T369-01-T8A
C5516
220p
50V
CH
R5539
0
R5535
56
XSYS_RST
C5529
0.1u
B
1005
R5504
100k
D5501
XX
Q5501
2SC4617HT2L
C5508
0.1u
10V
B
BGP
BLK
FRP
COM_FRP
XVC_SCK
XCS_PANEL
XTG_SO
XVC_SO
XVD
R5534
XX
2.7
2.8
2.8
2.7
0.2
2.8
2.8
0.1
1.4
1.4
2.5
BGP
SWCOM
SW
FRP
COM_FRP
XSCK
VDD/TESTI
XCS
SO
SI
VSYB
XVD
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
IC5502
TIMING GENERATOR
IC5502
CM7020L1-E2
8
HCNT/SPD
MCLK/CLD
CLR/CTR
OE/PSS2
SRT/PSS1
VDD/RES
RESET/EX2
STBYB/PSG
GSRT/MODE2
GPCK/MODE1
GRES/EX1
CP/SPS
0
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.3
1.4
0.1
1.2
1.4
R5514
0
1608
R5516
10k
C5520
10u
16V
C5522
0.1u
B
1005
C5523
0.1u
B
1005
C5521
1u
B
C5528
XX
D5503
XX
R5525
0
TG24
TG23
TG22
TG21
TG20
TG19
TG12
TG18
TG17
TG16
TG15
TG14
TG13
R5515
XX
R5520
0
TG24
TG23
TG22
TG21
TG20
TG19
TG18
TG17
TG16
TG15
TG14
TG13
SYNC
HOLD
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
R5518
0
1608
R5519
XX
R5517
220k
1608
TG12
RB5501
100
R5532
XX
R5530
0
Q5502
XX
SWITCH
C5532
XX
R5533
XX
R5527
XX
Q5505 xx
R5521
47k
BL_ON
LED
DETIN
2
TO(2/2)
SIGNAL PATH
REC
PB
CHROMA
VIDEO SIGNAL
Y
S
Q5504
XX
R5529
0
Y/CHROMA
RB5502
XX
Q5503
XX
R5528
0
C5524
1u
B
C5530
XX
C5531
XX
RB5503
XX
S
S
N.C.
VDD
VGL
VSS
VGH
OE
SRT
STBYB
VBC
VCOM
RESET
STBYB
GSRT
GPCK
GRES
VSH
VDD
VSS
VB
VG
VR
HCNT
MCLK
CLR
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
CN5501
24P
LCD901
2.5 INCH
LCD COLOR
UNIT
XVD_OUT
SYNC
XHD_OUT
R5522
1500
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
9
10
VB
XVD_OUT
VG
CN5502
PANEL_COM
VR
PANEL_ID
C-SYNC/XHD
XHD_OUT
GND
GND
10P
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
20
M
16
RGB, TIMING GENERATOR
PD-131 (1/2)
4-19 4-20
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-15 for printed wiring board.
1
2
A
PD-131 BOARD(2/2)
BACK LIGHT
-REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
B
C
D
E
1
TO(1/2)
2
TO(1/2)
BL_REG
BL_GND
PANEL_4.75V
PANEL_2.8V
DAC
SE_GND
BL_CONT
REG_GND
DETIN
BL_ON
LED
3
L5601
100uH R5601
1800
4
R5604
1800
5 6 7 8 9 10
R5608
XX
D5603
XX
R5609
XX
D5604
XX
2.8
C5607
4.7u
B
3216
2.8
3
-0.5
C5602
XX
B
5
1
2 6
C5603
0.015u
B
3
2
4
1
5
-0.5
Q5602
FP216-TL
INVERTER DRIVE
C5608
XX
B
4
T5601
INVERTER
TRANSFORMER
10
IC5602
BL DET.
VCC
R5602
100k
0.33
Q5603
XX
R5605
XX
C5606
12pF
3kV
SL
4520
D5602
XX
R5611
XX
ET5601
XX
ET5602
XX
3
2
1
6
5
4
8
7
10
9
BL_HIGH
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
BL_LOW
LED
LED_GND
CN5601 10P
2.8
IC5602
TA75S393F-TE85R
2.2
C5604
0.1u
B
1005
R5606
22k
D5601
1SS355TE-17
C5605
0.1u
B
1005
R5610
0
R5607
470
ND901
BACK LIGHT
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
RB5601
10K
C5601
XX
1005
1.6
0
IC5601
TC7W53FU(TE12R)
VCC
COM
CH0
INH
CH1
VEE
A
GND
Q5601
DTC144EHT2L
SWITCH
2.8
1.6
2.8
0
IC5601
BACK LIGHT
BRIGHT SWITCH
LD5605
A
F
16
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-21 4-22
BACK LIGHT
PD-131 (2/2)
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
VF-129 (B/W EVF) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
— Ref. No. VF-129 Board; 1,000 Series —
6
5
4
3
2
7
8
1
For printed wiring board
• Refer to page 4-70 for parts location.
• VF-129 board consists of multiple layers. However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts
Transistor
C
B E
There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
B/W EVF
VF-129
VF-129
(B/W EVF)
VC-256
CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA Y/C PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM DRIVE, EVR, DV SIGNAL PROCESS,
DV INTERFACE, DIGITAL REC/PB AMP, VIDEO OUT, HI CONTROL,
CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL, MECHANISM CONTROL,
DRUM/CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, AUDIO PROCESS, DC IN,
CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER
4-24
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-24 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-65 for waveforms.
1
2
A
B
D
E
G
VF-129 BOARD
B/W EVF
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
3
C
TO
VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
CN1006
THROUGH THE FFC-256
FLAT CABLE
(SEE PAGE
4-55)
CN901 4P
EVF_4.75V
EVF_GND
BW_EVF_Y
XTALLY_LED
1
2
3
4
D901
PR1102W-TR
(TALLY)
R903
1.8k
2012
C901
68u
6.3V
TA
C
F
TRV130
4 5
1 2
V OUT
3 4 5
V OSC
6 7 8
1
2
R915
22k
R914
XX
R913
XX
TH901
XX
R930
3.3
R932
4700
R929
1k
3
C907
0.1u
±
R916
27k
0.5%
TRV130E
±
R917
*
0.5%
R917
R931
1
68K:
82K:
TRV130
TRV130E
RV903
470
V SIZE
6 7
5
6
R910
15k
C903
0.47u
25V
TA
A
C904
1500p
B
C905
33u
6.3V
TA
B
R911
27
3216
R909
10k
R907
100k
R908
390k
C913
0.47u
25V
TA
A
C906
1u
F
3216
R912
1M
4
R918
4700
Q903
2SA1163G-TE85L
VIDEO AMP
1.8
R927
1k
R928
3300
Q904
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
VIDEO DRIVE
4.6
-12.3
L902
33uH
±
5%
3225
C908
27p
CH
2.3
-11.7
R920
22k
R919
68k
R901
470
R902
470
R904
10k
0.4
C902
0.1u
F
2012
R905
1200
Q901
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
4.9V DETECTOR
Q902
2SD1615-T1GLGK
H OUT
4.4
C909
0.001u
B
2012
R906
1500
SOL901
L901
47uH
3225
C910
4700p
SL
C911
6800p
SL
C912
68u
6.3V
TA
C
IC901
VIDEO AMP
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
L903
HLC
9 10 11
T902 XX
2
1
3
4
5
7
6 8
4
5
6
T901
F.B.T
3
2
R921
6.8
HV
3
4
5
1
2
W901 5P
G1
H
H
N.C.
G2
250V
7
1
C914
1.5u
35V
TA
A
8
C916
0.001u
500V
R923
1M
R922
270k
RV904
470k
R924
2.7M
BRIGHT
R926
1k
R925
2.7M
C915
0.022u
B
2012
V901
DEFLECTION YOKE
2200V
CN902 4P
1
2
DV1
DV2
3
4
DH1
DH2
H
H
Note :
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
12
PICTURE TUBE
(M01KXX90WB)
HV
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y
REC
PB
Y/CHROMA
H
16
13
4-25 4-26
B/W EVF
VF-129
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
1
2 3
A
B
C
D
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1000)
SWITCH,INDICATOR DRIVE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
TO
VC-256 BOARD(13/15)
CN1007
(THROUGH THE
FFC-295 FLAT CABLE)
(SEE PAGE
4-56)
CN001
24P
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
BL_GND
LCD_LED_ON
LI_3V
DIAL_A
DIAL_B
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
VTR_UNREG
D_2.8V
EVER_3.0V
XCHARGE_LED_ON
SP+
SP-
REG_GND
XCS_LCD_DRIVER
LCD_COM/XDATA
OSD_SO
XOSD_SCK
XHI_RESET
HP_L_OUT
HP_JACK_IN
HP_R_OUT
HEADPHONE_GND
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XCS_LCD
COM/XD
OSD_SO
XOSD_SCK
4
R005
150
E
5 6 7 8 9
8
9
6
7
3
4
1
2
5
10
11
12
REG_GND
REG_GND
XHI_RESET
CN005
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
DIAL_A
OPEN/CLOSE SW
DIAL_B
D_2.8V
EVER_3.0V
XCHARGE_LED_ON
BT001
LITHIUM BATTERY
12P
1
2
CN006
OPEN/CLOSE SW
REG_GND
2P
S001
RESET
S901
OPEN/CLOSE
R004
10k
R003
10k
R002
10k
D001
TLAU1008(T05,SOY)
(CHARGE LED)
S002
MENU
R006
1200
S004
EXPOSURE
R007
1200
S005
XX
R010
1500
R011
1500
10
S007
SEL/PUSH EXEC
11
R013
2200
S010
XX
R014
2200
12
R017
3900
13 14
R016
3900
S013
VOLUME+
R019
8200
S016
VOLUME-
R022
27k
R020
8200
S017
XX
15
R023
27k
S018
BACK LIGHT
16
S003
TIME
R008
1200
S006
NIGHT SHOT
R012
1500
S009
END SEARCH
R015
2200
S012
DISPLAY
R018
3900
S015
XX
R021
8200
S022
FADER
R024
27k
S019
FOCUS
F
G
H
J001
(HEADPHONES)
I
SP901
SPEAKER
R001
0
CN003
2P
LND001
SEIDEN
SP(+)
SP(-)
1
2
C007
XX
B
L004
100uH
L003
0uH
VDR001
C008
0.001u
B
VDR002
J
K
16
SIGNAL PATH
AUDIO
SIGNAL
REC
PB
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
D002
XX
XOSD_SCK
OSD_SO
C001
0.1u
B
R009
680k
OSC1
OSC2
VSS
VC
VLCD
VDD
SCK
SD
IC001
LCD DRIVE
IC001
BU9735K-E2
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
XCS_LCD
COM/XD
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Q002
2SA1576A-T106-R
SWITCH
R029
33
R030
390
Q003
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
SWITCH
R031
0
R032
100k
R033
XX
R034
560
R052
0
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
10 9 8 7 6
R026
180k
C002
XX
B
C003
10u
10V
L002
IC003
EL DRIVE
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
COM4
COM3
COM1
COM2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
1 2 3 4 5
R027
0
D004
MA1010000LS0
C004
4700p
200V
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(CF-1000) is replaced as a block.
So the PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
-EL
-EL
N.C
N.C
EL
EL
N.C
BL_GND
CN004 8P
D901
EL
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
COM4
COM3
COM1
COM2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN003 16P
LCD902
CHARACTER
DISPLAY
17
CH GND
LND002
CH GND
LND003
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(CF-1000)
4-27 4-28
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
LS-057 (S/T REEL SENSOR), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-299 (MODE SWITCH), FP-300 (TAPE TOP), FP-302 (TAPE END), FP-301 (TAPE LED) FLEXIBLE BOARDS
FP-300 FLEXIBLE (COMPONENT SIDE)
FP-302
FLEXIBLE
Q002
TAPE END
LS-057 BOARD
FP-301
FLEXIBLE
D001
TAPE LED
1-680-436-
Q001
TAPE TOP
SENSOR
1 15
2
1
H002
S REEL
SENSOR
3
4
1
11
15
2
1
H001
T REEL
SENSOR
3
4
LS-057 BOARD
(CONDUCTOR SIDE)
S001
REC PROOF
S002
C.C. LOCK
15 1
D001
TAPE LED
FP-299
FLEXIBLE
M902
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
H001
T REEL
SENSOR
FP-299
S901
MODE SWITCH
FLEXIBLE
DEW SENSOR
FP-228
FLEXIBLE
1
MR SENSOR
4
DEW SENSOR
1-680-437-
11
FP-301 FLEXIBLE
(CONDUCTOR SIDE)
1-677-049-
11
FP-228
FLEXIBLE
1
C
B
A
COM
S901
MODE
SWITCH
22
4-29
11
H002
S REEL
SENSOR o'
1-680-473-
11
FP-302 FLEXIBLE
(CONDUCTOR SIDE)
1-680-438-
11
Q002
TAPE END
SENSOR
S/T REEL SENSOR
LS-057
/
DEW SENSOR
FP-228
MR
SENSOR
1
2
3
4
M902
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
3
4
HE
2
1
3
4
2
HE
1
3
4
2
HE
1
/
MODE SWITCH
FP-299
S001
ME/MP
REC PROOF
Hi8 MP
S002
C.C. LOCK
FP-300
FLEXIBLE
Q001
TAPE TOP
1
2
3
TAPE TOP (C)
TAPE END (C)
TAPE LED (K)
4
5
6
TAPE LED (A)
GND
S REEL (-)
7
8
9
10
S REEL (+)
SENSOR (Vcc)
T REEL (+)
T REEL (-)
HALL COM
11
12
13
14
ME/MP
REC PROOF
Hi8 MP
15
C LOCK SW
TO
MECHA
CONTROL
BLOCK
/
VH+
HU 1
HU 2
HV 1
HV 2
COIL-U
COIL-W
COIL-W
COIL-V
COIL-V
DEW
A
B
C
FG1 (Vo2)
VCC
FG2 (Vo1)
GND (C0M)
COIL-U
HW 1
HW 2
VH-
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
9
10
11
12
13
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
TO
MECHA
CONTROL
BLOCK
TAPE TOP
FP-300
/
TAPE END
FP-302
/
TAPE LED
FP-301
Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-256 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-31 to 4-64 are not shown.
FP-258 (VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO) FLEXIBLE BOARD
FP-258 FLEXIBLE
For printed wiring board
There are a few cases that the part printed on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
FP-258
(VIDEO LIGHT, S VIDEO)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(SS-1000)
(VIDEO LIGHT)
20
1
J201
G
Y
C
G
S VIDEO
OUT
FP-260
A/V
OUT
CN201
DV IN/OUT
1-680-199- 11
J201
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
LIGHT
FP-258
FLEXIBLE
VIDEO LIGHT,S VIDEO
LND151
LIGHT VCC
LND152
LIGHT VCC
LND154
LIGHT GND
LND155
LIGHT GND
LND102
SEIDEN
SOL001
A/V OUT
DV IN/OUT
16
LND201
A
LND101
A
CN201
TPA
4P
4
NTPA
TPB
3
2
NTPB 1
CN1001 20P
VL_UNREG
VL_UNREG
UNREG_GND
UNREG_GND
XS_JACK_IN
S_C_I/O
REG_GND
S_Y_I/O
AUDIO_R_I/O
REG_GND
VIDEO_I/O
REG_GND
AUDIO_L_I/O
V_JACK_IN
REG_GND
NTPB
TPB
REG_GND
TPA
NTPA
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
20
19
18
17
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TO
VC-256 BOARD (13/15)
(SEE PAGE 4-55 of LEVEL 3)
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-3. WAVEFORMS
CD-281
BOARD
CAMERA REC
1
IC191
1
,
2
MI-041
BOARD
REC/PB, IR ON
1
IC3901
7
PD-131
1
IC5501
BOARD
rk
VF-129
BOARD
REC/PB
1
IC901
1
,
5
2
IC191
3
,
4
H
6.8Vp-p
3.5795 MHz
0.2Vp-p
2
IC3901 ws
H
2
IC5501 rj
0.5Vp-p
16.7 msec
2
IC901
3
2.0Vp-p
3
IC191
7
H
6.8Vp-p
0.5
µ sec/div
3
IC3901 ra
0.9Vp-p
H
3
IC5501 rh
0.5Vp-p
16.7 msec
3
IC901
7
2.0Vp-p
H
4
IC191 qs“
0.6Vp-p
H
0.6Vp-p
H
4
IC5501 w;
0.5Vp-p
16.7 msec
4
IC901 qa
1.1Vp-p
105 nsec
5
IC191 qd
, qf¢
105 nsec
6
Q191
E
H
4.6Vp-p
6.8Vp-p
0.6Vp-p
2H
5
IC5501 ws
3.0Vp-p
5
IC901 qd
H
0.9Vp-p
2H
6
IC5501 wf
3.0Vp-p
6
IC901 qh
H
1.1Vp-p
2H
7
IC5502
1
3.0Vp-p
H
2.4Vp-p
H
8
IC5502 wh
2.8Vp-p
6 MHz
3.0Vp-p
4-65
WAVEFORMS
CD-281, MI-041, PD-131, VF-129
Waveforms and parts location of the VC-256 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-66 to 4-68 are not shown.
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
CD-281 BOARD (SIDE A)
C191 B-2
C196 B-1
IC191 A-2
CD-281 BOARD (SIDE B)
C193 A-4
C194 B-5
C195 A-4
C197 A-4
CN191 A-5
L191 B-4
Q191 A-5
R191 A-5
R192 A-4
R193 A-4
R194 B-4
R195 B-5
R198 A-4
MI-041 BOARD (SIDE A)
C3906 B-1
C3907 B-2
C3908 B-1
C3910 B-2
C3911 B-2
C3912 C-3
C3913 B-3
C3914 A-2
C3915 A-1
C3916 A-1
C3917 A-2
C3918 A-2
C3919 A-1
C3920 A-1
C3921 A-3
C3922 A-1
C758 D-2
C762 D-1
C775 B-2
C784 C-2
C791 B-2
C794 C-3
C799 B-4
C800 C-4
C808 C-4
C809 C-4
C810 B-3
C3901 B-2
C3902 B-2
C3903 B-2
C3904 B-2
C3905 B-1
C3923 A-3
C3924 A-1
C3925 A-1
C3926 A-2
C3929 A-2
C3930 A-2
C3932 C-3
C3934 A-3
C3935 A-2
D752 B-3
D753 B-4
D754 A-1
D755 C-4
D756 C-4
D3901 B-4
D3902 A-3
D3903 A-4
IC751 B-3
IC3901 A-2
L3903 A-3
SE751 C-2
SE752 E-2
R786 B-4
R797 C-3
R3901 A-3
R3903 B-2
R3904 B-2
R3905 B-1
R3907 B-1
R3908 A-3
R3909 A-2
R3912 A-3
R3913 A-1
R3914 A-1
R3915 A-2
R3916 A-2
R3917 A-2
R3926 A-3
R3927 B-3
R3931 B-2
R3945 A-1
R3946 A-3
MI-041 BOARD (SIDE B)
C759 E-7
C761 B-5
C763 C-7
C764 C-5
C768 C-7
C769 B-5
C770 C-5
C772 C-7
C773 B-5
C774 C-7
C776 C-5
C777 C-7
C779 B-5
C780 B-5
C781 C-5
C782 C-5
C783 B-5
C785 B-5
C786 B-5
C787 C-6
C788 B-5
C789 B-8
C796 C-5
C3909 B-7
C3931 A-7
C3933 B-6
Q3902 A-7
Q3903 A-5
Q3904 A-5
CN751 C-5
CN752 C-6
CN753 B-6
IC752 B-5
IC753 B-7
L751 B-6
L3902 B-7
L3904 A-6
L3905 A-6
L3906 B-6
R782 B-7
R783 B-7
R784 B-7
R785 B-7
R788 B-5
R789 B-5
R3902 B-7
R3919 A-7
R3920 A-7
R3921 A-7
R3922 A-5
R3923 A-6
R3924 B-6
R3925 A-6
R3928 B-6
R3929 A-6
R3930 B-7
R757 C-5
R761 B-5
R764 B-5
R765 B-5
R766 C-5
R767 C-5
R768 B-5
R769 C-5
R770 B-5
R771 B-5
R772 B-5
R774 C-5
R775 C-6
R776 C-6
R779 B-7
R780 C-7
Q3901 A-7
RB751 C-7
RB752 E-7
RB3901 B-8
PD-131 BOARD (SIDE A)
C5517 A-4
C5518 A-4
C5519 A-4
C5520 C-3
C5521 B-2
C5522 B-1
C5523 A-3
C5524 A-1
C5525 B-4
C5526 B-4
C5527 B-4
C5528 C-2
C5529 B-3
C5530 A-2
C5531 A-2
C5532 B-1
C5501 C-3
C5502 C-3
C5503 B-4
C5504 B-3
C5505 B-4
C5506 B-4
C5507 B-4
C5508 C-3
C5509 C-4
C5510 B-4
C5511 B-3
C5512 B-3
C5513 B-4
C5514 C-4
C5515 B-3
C5516 A-3
C5601 A-4
C5602 C-5
C5603 C-6
C5604 A-5
C5605 A-5
C5606 A-6
C5607 C-5
C5608 C-6
Q5501 C-3
Q5502 B-1
Q5503 A-2
Q5504 A-2
Q5505 B-1
Q5601 A-4
Q5602 C-6
Q5603 A-5
CN5501 A-2
CN5502 B-2
CN5601 A-6
CN5701 B-6
CN5702 D-6
D5501 C-3
D5502 A-4
D5503 A-2
D5601 A-5
D5603 D-2
D5604 D-2
ET5601 A-5
ET5602 C-6
FB5501 C-3
FB5502 C-4
R5517 B-2
R5518 B-2
R5519 B-2
R5520 A-3
R5521 B-2
R5522 B-2
R5523 C-4
R5524 C-4
R5525 C-2
R5526 C-3
R5527 A-1
R5528 A-2
R5529 A-2
R5530 A-2
R5531 C-4
R5532 B-1
R5501 C-4
R5502 C-4
R5503 C-4
R5504 B-3
R5505 B-4
R5506 B-4
R5507 B-4
R5508 B-4
R5509 B-4
R5510 B-3
R5511 B-3
R5512 B-4
R5513 B-3
R5514 A-3
R5515 A-3
R5516 C-2
R5533 B-2
R5534 B-3
R5535 B-3
R5539 D-6
R5601 C-5
R5602 A-5
R5603 B-5
R5604 C-5
R5605 A-6
R5606 A-5
R5607 A-5
R5608 D-2
R5609 D-2
R5610 A-5
R5611 A-5
R5702 D-6
R5703 C-6
IC5501 B-4
IC5502 B-3
IC5601 A-4
IC5602 A-5
RB5501 A-3
RB5502 A-2
RB5503 A-2
RB5601 A-4
T5601 B-6
L5501 C-3
L5502 C-4
L5503 B-3
L5601 C-5
PD-131 BOARD (SIDE B)
D5602 A-8
4-69
PARTS LOCATION
CD-281, MI-041, PD-131
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
VF-129 BOARD (SIDE A)
C903 A-2
C904 B-2
C906 A-2
C907 A-1
C909 B-1
C913 A-2
CN902 B-1
D901 A-1
IC901 A-1
R913 C-2
R914 C-1
R915 A-1
R916 A-1
R917 A-1
R922 D-1
R927 B-1
R928 B-1
R929 A-1
R930 C-1
R931 C-1
R932 C-1
L901
L903
B-1
D-1
R903 A-1
R907 B-1
R908 B-2
R909 B-2
R910 B-2
R912 A-2
RV903 C-2
RV904 D-1
T901
T902
D-1
D-1
TH901 C-2
W901 D-2
VF-129 BOARD (SIDE B)
C901 A-3
C902 A-2
C905 A-3
C908 B-2
C910 C-3
C911 C-3
C912 B-3
C914 D-3
C915 D-3
C916 C-3
CN901 B-3
D903 D-3
R901 A-3
R902 A-2
R904 A-3
R905 A-2
R906 A-2
R911 A-3
R918 C-2
R919 C-2
R920 C-2
R921 D-2
R923 D-3
R924 C-3
R925 C-3
R926 D-2
L902 B-2
Q901 A-2
Q902 B-2
Q903 C-3
Q904 C-2
PARTS LOCATION
VF-129
4-70E
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
5-1
1.
Before starting adjustment
1-1.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z
in the following table.
Block replacement
Replaced parts
Parts replacement
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
EVF
LCD
System control
Servo
Video
IR *4
Mechanism
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
Centering adj.
Focus adj.
Aberration adj.
Horizontal amplitude adj.
Vertical amplitude adj.
Brightness adj.
Initial data input
VCO adj.
RGB AMP adj.
Contrast adj.
COM-AMP adj.
V-COM adj.
White balance adj.
Serial No. input
REEL FG adj.
CAP FG duty adj.
Switching position adj.
AGC center level adj.
APC & AEQ adj.
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
27MHz origin oscillation adj.
Chroma BPF fo adj.
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj.
IR video carrier frequency adj.
IR video deviation adj.
IR audio deviation adj.
Tape path adj.
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Table. 5-1-1(1).
5-2 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z
in the following table.
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
Board replacement
*1: When replacing the drum assy. or mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to
“Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*2: When replacing the video light, reset the data of page:
2, address: E0 to E2 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*3: When replacing the EL-Back light, reset the data of page: 2, address: E3 to E5 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of
Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*4: NTSC model only
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
EVF
LCD
System control
Servo
Video
IR *4
Mechanism
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
Centering adj.
Focus adj.
Aberration adj.
Horizontal amplitude adj.
Vertical amplitude adj.
Brightness adj.
Initial data input
VCO adj.
RGB AMP adj.
Contrast adj.
COM-AMP adj.
V-COM adj.
White balance adj.
Serial No. input
REEL FG adj.
CAP FG duty adj.
Switching position adj.
AGC center level adj.
APC & AEQ adj.
PLL fo & LPF fo adj.
27MHz origin oscillation adj.
Chroma BPF fo adj.
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj.
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj.
IR video carrier frequency adj.
IR video deviation adj.
IR audio deviation adj.
Tape path adj.
Table. 5-1-1(2).
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
5-3
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
1-1-1.
List of Service Tools
• Oscilloscope
• Regulated power supply
• Color monitor
• Digital voltmeter
• Vectorscope
J-6
J-7
J-8
J-9
J-10
J-11
J-12
Ref. No.
J-1
J-2
J-3
J-4
J-5
Name
Filter for color temperature correction (C14)
ND filter 1.0
ND filter 0.4
ND filter 0.1
Pattern box PTB-450
Color chart for pattern box
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded)
(Note)
Siemens star chart
Clear chart for pattern box
Multi CPC jig
CPC jig for BX/BK
IR receiver jig
Minipattern box
Camera base
Parts Code
J-6080-058-A
J-6080-808-A
J-6080-806-A
J-6080-807-A
J-6082-200-A
J-6020-250-A
J-6082-053-B
J-6080-875-A
J-6080-621-A
J-6082-311-A
J-6082-521-A
J-6082-383-A
J-6082-353-B
J-6082-384-A
Usage
Auto white balance adjustment/check
White balance adjustment/check
White balance check
White balance check
White balance check
For checking the flange back
For adjusting the LCD block
For connecting the adjustment remote commander
For adjusting the IR transmitter
For adjusting the flange back
For adjusting the flange back
Note:
If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), the pages cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8-
759-148-35).
J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5
J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10
J-11 J-12
Fig. 5-1-1.
5-4
1-1-2.
Preparations
Note1:
For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2.
DISASSEMBLY”.
Note2:
When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassembled.
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-4.
2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of
CPC jig for BX/BK. (Fig. 5-1-3.)
3) The front panel block (MI-041 board, microphone unit, video light) need not be assembled except during the steady shot operation check.
Note3:
As removing the cabinet (R) (removing the VC-256 board CN1007) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (CF-1000 block
BT101), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet (R) has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of use (total drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2, address: B0 to C6) and data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA and E0 to
E5). (Refer to “5-4. Service Mode” for the self-diagnosis data and data on the history use.)
Note4:
Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on with the SS-1000 block removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”.
Note5:
Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Pattern box
1.5 m
Front of the lens
Fig. 5-1-2.
CN1011
1
2
19 20
Fig. 5-1-3.
Remove the
CPC lid
5-5
Note:
Use either the AC power adaptor or the Info-LITHIUM battery as the power supply of the CPC jig for BX/BK.
CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A)
AC power adaptor
(8.4Vdc)
AC-L10 or
AC-VQ800
Terminated at 75
Ω
LANC jack
Vector scope
Adjustment remote commander
L series
Info LITHIUM battery
(7.2Vdc)
Must be connected
Color monitor
EVF block
VIDEO
(Yellew)
AUDIO
(Black)
Must be connected when performing the EVF system adiustments.
Front panel block
CN1551
MI-041 board
CN754
A/V OUT jack
CN1008
TO SS-1000 block
Lens block
CN1501
CN701
CN1011
CN1006
CN1003
CN1002
VC-256 board
CN4401
CN4402
CN4403 CN3101
CN1007
CN1009
CN4404
Must be connected
Must be connected when performing the steady shot check.
Must be connected.
Cabinet (R)
To CF-1000 block CN001
Must be connected when performing the LCD system adjustments.
To PD-131 board
CN5701
Multi CPC jig
(J-6082-311-A)
CN5601
PD-131 board
CN5701
CN5501
CN5502
CN5702
DC IN jack
AC power adaptor
(8.4Vdc)
AC-L10 or
AC-VQ800
Must be connected when performing the LCD system adjustment.
Fig. 5-1-4.
5-6
1-1-3.
Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette.
1.
POWER switch (SS-1000 block) ........................... CAMERA
2.
NIGHT SHOT switch (Lens block) ................................. OFF
3.
LIGHT switch (FK-1000 block) ...................................... OFF
4.
DEMO MODE (Menu display) ....................................... OFF
5.
DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
6.
STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
7.
DISPLAY (Menu display) ................................. V-OUT/LCD
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
H
C C=D
8.
DISPLAY (CF-1000 block) .............................................. ON
9.
FOCUS switch (CF-1000 block) .......................... MANUAL
10. BACK LIGHT (CF-1000 block) ...................................... OFF
11. PROGRAM AE (Menu display) ...................................... OFF
12. PICTURE EFFECT (Menu display) ................................ OFF
13. 16 : 9 WIDE (MENU display) ......................................... OFF
D
Electronic beam scanning frame
CRT picture frame
A B
A=B
Fig. a
(VIDEO terminal output waveform)
B
A
Enlargement
V
Fig. b (monitor TV picture)
Difference in level
B
A
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
Fig.5-1-5.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-5. (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-6 using A0 size (1189mm
×
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Black
White
841mm
1189mm
Fig. 5-1-6.
Note:
Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
5-7
1-2.
INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE
DATA
1-2-1.
INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data
Note1:
If “Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
C page, D page and 8 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.)
Note2:
If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, the following adjustments need to be performed again.
1) Modification of C, D, 8 page data
2) Serial No. input
3) LCD system adjustments
4) Servo and RF system adjustments
5) Video system adjustments
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
C
10 to FF
D
10 to FF
8
00 to FF
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01 01 Set the data
Procedure
2
3
4
3
3
3
81
80
80
10 Set the data
0A Set the data, and press the PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“1A”
5 Perform “Modification of C, D,
8 Page Data”.
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data
If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, change the data of the
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model.
Note:
If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of C, D, 8 Page data
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
2
2
00
01
29 Set the data
29 Set the data, and press the PAUSE button.
Note:
If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
“Modification of C, D, 8 page data”, check that the data of the “Fixed data-2” addresses of D page are same as those of the same model of the same destination.
1) The battery end mark on the LCD screen is flashing.
2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
3. C Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Address
Initial value
21
22
23 to 24
25
26
27
28
29
2A to 2B
2C
2D to 2F
30
31 to 46
47
48 to 85
86
87 to 88
89
1D
1E
1F
20
19
1A
1B
1C
00 to 0F
10
11
12
13
14 to 16
17
18
8A to 91
92
93 to 99
9A
9B
EE
00
00
00
E0
25
25
25
25
25
3E
3E
CA
99
88
E3
A1
04
20
03
E0
Remark
Switching position adj.
Fixed data-1
REEL FG adj.
AEQ adj.
Fixed data-1
AEQ adj.
Fixed data-1
AGC center level adj.
PLL fo adj.
APC adj.
LPF fo adj.
Fixed data-1
S VIDEO out Y level adj.
S VIDEO out Cr level adj.
S VIDEO out Cb level adj.
Chroma BPF fo adj.
PLL fo fine adj.
Fixed data-1
APC adj.
Fixed data-1
REEL FG adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
5-8
C page
EF
F0 to F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
EB
EC
ED
EE
E7
E8
E9
EA
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Address
Initial value
9C to D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1 to E5
E6
02
00
00
00
08
00
46
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Serial No. input
Fixed data-1
Emergency memory address
Table. 5-1-2.
5-9
4. D Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Address
Initial value
4D
4E
4F
50
49
4A
4B
4C
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 to 2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32 to 3F
40
00 to 0F
10
11 to 12
13
14
15
16 to 1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
00
Remark
Test mode
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
D page
Address
Initial value
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D to 60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69 to 86
87
88
89
8A
8B
AD
AE to AF
B0
B1
B2 to B7
B8
B9 to BB
BC
BD to FF
A9
AA
AB
AC
A5
A6
A7
A8
8C
8D
8E to 9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
80
70
80
20
80
80
80
30
Remark
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
(Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
VCO adj. (LCD)
V-COM adj. (LCD)
RGB AMP adj.(LCD)
Fixed data-1
COM AMP adj. ( LCD)
White balance adj. (LCD)
Contrast adj. (LCD)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-3.
5. 8 Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Address Remark
00 to 3F
40
41 to 8F
90
91 to FF
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-4.
5-10
1-2-2.
INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data
Note1:
If “Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
E page, F page and 7 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.)
Note2:
If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, following adjustments need to be performed again.
1) Modification of E, F, 7 page data
2) Camera system adjustments
3) Servo and RF system adjustments
4) Video system adjustments
5) IR transmitter adjustments
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
Adjusting page
Adjusting Address
F
10 to FF
E
00 to FF
7
00 to FF
Note:
NTSC model: DCR-TRV130
PAL model: DCR-TRV130E
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
6
01
00
3
4
5
6
6
01
02
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Set the following data.
55: NTSC model
51: PAL model
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
55: NTSC model
51: PAL model
Check that the data changes to
“01”.
Perform “Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data
If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, change the data of the
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input.
Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model.
Note:
If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 7 Page data
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
2
2
00
01
29 Set the data
29 Set the data, and press the PAUSE button.
3. F Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
5B
5C
5D
5E
57
58
59
5A
53
54
55
56
4F
50
51
52
3F
40
41
42
3B
3C
3D
3E
Address
Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 0F
10 to 27
28
29 to 37
38
39
3A
68
80
8D
68
80
8D
80
7A
2B
80
65
80
8D
87 43
44 to 46
47
48
49
4A to 4C
4D
4E
33
34
80
7A
2B
80
65
80
8D
87
33
34
4A
12
0B
54
8C
28
07
3A
4A
12
0B
54
8C
28
07
3A
00
00
04
00
00
19
00
37
00
00
04
00
00
19
00
37
5F
60
61
62 to 63
00
51
4A
00
00
75
5A
00
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
HALL adj.
Fixed data-2
Auto white balance & LV standard data Input
Auto white balance adj.
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
27MHz origin osc. adj.
Flange back Adj.
Angular velocity sensor sensitivity adj.
Fixed data-1
Flange back Adj.
Fixed data-1
5-11
F page
Address
64
65 to 7D
Initial value
NTSC PAL
83 83
7E
7F
80
81 to 99
41
33
C7
41
33
C7
9A
9B to CC
CD
CE to D3
D4
D5 to D6
D7
D8
FD
F4
0F
31
FC
F2
33
11
D9
DA
DB to DE
DF
E0 to E9
FA
FB to FF
Remark
CAP FG duty adj.
Fixed data-1
IR video deviation adj.
IR audio deviation adj.
IR video carrier freq. adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-5.
4. E Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Address
Remark
00 to 03
04
05 to 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C to 50
51
52 to 54
55
56
57
58 to 7D
7E
7F to FF
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-6.
5. 7 Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Address
Remark
00 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.
5-12
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are satisfied.
1. HALL Adjustment
For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and offset.
Subject
Measurement Point
Not required
Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value 1
Specified Value 2
38, 39, 3A
88 to 8C
15 to 19
Note1:
Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : 00 : XX
IRIS display data
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
3
4
1
2
0
6
6
6
01
94
95
01
5
6
6
6
02
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
8A Set the data.
17 Set the data.
6D Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note2)
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Note2:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
38, 39, 3A.
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 03
Procedure
03 Set the data.
2 6 01
3 1
01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified value 1.
4
5
6
1
01 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified value.2.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 94 00 Set the data.
2
3
4
5
6
6
0
0
95
01
03
01
00 Set the data.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
00 Set the data.
5-13
2. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Minipattern Box)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for the minipattern box (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 4E to 5D, 61
Note1:
Dark Siemens star chart.
Note2:
Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations:
1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm.
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal.
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the specified voltage.
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure screen coincide.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.
Below 3 cm
Minipattern box
Camcorder
Camera table
Regulated power supply
Output voltage : Specified voltage
±
0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 6 01
3
4
6
6
01
02
13 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
27 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note3)
Note3:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
4E to 5D, 61.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
3
0 01 00 Set the data.
Turn off the power and turn on again.
Perform “Flange Back Check”.
Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)
White (SENS –)
Black (GND)
Need not connected
Fig. 5-1-7.
5-14
3. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject
More Than 500m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing.
3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1)
Subject Flange back adjustment chart
(2.0 m from the front of the protection glass)(Luminance: 350 ± 50 lux)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 4E to 5D, 61
Note1:
Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 6 01
3 6 01
13 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
15 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note2)
Note2:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
4E to 5D, 61.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
Turn off the power and turn on again.
Perform “Flange Back
Adjustment (2)”
3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment
(1)”.
Subject Subject more than 500m away
(Subjects with clear contrast such as buildings, etc.)
Check operation on TV monitor Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
4E to 5D, 61
Note1:
Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations:
1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should not be in the screen.)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 6 01
3
4
5
6
6
01
02
13 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Place a ND filter on the lens so that the optimum image is obtain.
29 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”.(Note2)
Note2:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
4E to 5D, 61.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
0 01 00 Set the data.
Turn off the power and turn on again.
3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
5-15
4. Flange Back Check
Subject Siemens star
(2.0m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux)
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
Check operation on TV monitor
Specified Value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Note:
When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 0F.
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus.
1 : 00 : XX
Odd: Focused
Even: Unfocused
Checking method:
1) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 02.
2) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01.
3) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens.
4) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
5) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
6) Turn on the auto focus.
7) Check that the lens is focused (Note).
8) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10.
9) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
10) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00.
2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00.
4) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.
5. Picture Frame Setting
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
(1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Setting method:
1) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the specified position.
2) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display, and adjust the picture frame to this position in following adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.
Check on the oscilloscope
1. Horizontal period
A=B
B
A
C
C=D
D
2. Vertical period
E
Fig. 5-1-8.
E=F
F
V
Fig. 5-1-9.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
5-16
Color bar chart picture frame
Fig. 5-1-10.
Monitor TV picture frame
6. Color Reproduction Adjustment
Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color reproduction is produced.
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
F
47, 49, D7, D8
All color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame.
Note:
NTSC model: DCR-TRV130
PAL model: DCR-TRV130E
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 8B, and write down the data.
3) Select page: F, address: 8B, set data: 29, and press the PAUSE button.
4) Select page: F, address: 2B, set the following data, and press the PAUSE button.
17: NTSC model
97: PAL model
5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE button.
6) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color reproduction frame.
7) Change the data of page: F, address: 47, 49, D7 and D8, settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction frame.
Note:
Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data will not be written to the memory.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1) Select page: F, address: 8B, set the data written down at step
2), and press the PAUSE button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
For NTSC model
Burst position
For PAL model
Burst position
Fig. 5-1-11.
5-17
7. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input
Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K, and adjust the normal coefficient of the light value.
Subject Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 3C to 41
Note1:
This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Color reproduction adjustments”.
Note2:
After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once.
Note3:
Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 6 16 02 Set the data.
3
4 6 01
5
6
6
6
01
02
Wait for 2 sec.
11 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
0D Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4)
Note4:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
3C to 41.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01
2
3
4
6
0
16
01
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
Perform “Auto White Balance
Adjustment”.
5-18
8. Auto White Balance Adjustment
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data.
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor.
Subject
Filter
Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Filter C14 for color temperature correction
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note3)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
42, 43
NTSC model
R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0
B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0
PAL model
R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0
Note1:
After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once.
Note2:
Perform “Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input” before this adjustment.
Note3:
Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
F
F
F
F
01
B8
B8
B9
B9
Procedure
Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens.
01 Set the data.
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2C (NTSC), 2D (PAL)
Write down the data.
80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
7
8
F
F
BA
BA
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
F
F
6
6
6
6
0
1
0
1
BB
BB
01
01
02
01
03
03
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
5E (NTSC), 5B (PAL)
Write down the data.
80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Wait for 2 sec.
A5 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4)
3F Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
04 Set the data.
Check that the display data (Note3) satisfies the R ratio specified value.
05 Set the data.
Check that the display data (Note3) satisfies the B ratio specified value.
Note4:
The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
42, 43.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
2
3
F
F
B8
B9
Set the data that is written down at step 3, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data that is written down at step 5, and press PAUSE button.
4 F BA
5
6
7
F
0
0
BB
03
01
Set the data that is written down at step 7, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data that is written down at step 9, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
00 Set the data.
5-19
9. White Balance Check
Subject Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Filter
Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature correction
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1
Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Specified Value Fig. 5-1-12. A to B
Switch setting:
1) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF
4) LIGHT (FK-1000 block) .................................................. OFF
Checking method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
01
01
01
Procedure
Indoor white balance check
Check that the lens is not covered with either filter.
0F Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-12. A.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Outdoor white balance check
Place the C14 filter on the lens.
7
8
9
3F Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-12. B.
Remove the C14 filter.
LV data check
Place the ND filter 1.5
(1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
10
11
12
13
6
0
1
01
03
0F Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Wait for 2 sec.
06 Set the data.
Check that the display data (Note) satisfies the specified value.
Specified value: 0000 to 0BC0
Note:
Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
2 0 03 00 Set the data.
R-Y
2mm
B-Y
2mm
Fig. 5-1-12. (A)
R-Y
1.5mm
B-Y
3mm
3mm
Fig. 5-1-12. (B)
5-20
10. Angular Velocity Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
Precautions on the Parts Replacement
There are two types of repair parts.
Type A: ENC03JA
Type B: ENC03JB
Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing, readjust according to the adjusting method after replacement.
Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor
The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and operations will not be performed properly.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
5E, 5F
Specified Value 2900 to 4D00
Note:
Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Switch setting:
1) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ...................................... ON
2) ZOOM .......................................................................... Center
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 F 5E
3
4
5
F
0
1
5F
03
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
51 (NTSC), 75 (PAL)
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
4A (NTSC), 5A (PAL)
Pitch sensor check
(MI-041 board SE751)
11 Set the data.
Check that the display data (Note) satisfies the specified value.
Yaw sensor check
(MI-041 board SE752)
6
7
0
1
03 12 Set the data.
Check that the display data (Note) satisfies the specified value.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1
2
3
0
0
01
03
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
Move the camcorder, and check that the steady shot operations have been performed normally
5-21
1-4.
MONOCHROME ELECTRONIC
VIEWFINEDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Note:
NTSC model: DCR-TRV130
PAL model: DCR-TRV130E
1-4-1. Horizontal Slant Check
Mode Playback
Signal
Specified Value
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
± 1.5
°
Adjustment method:
1) Adjust RV904 (BRIGHT) (VF-129 board) so that the CRT can be seen easily and clearly.
2) Check that the difference between the horizontal line and the tilt of black mask satisfies the specified value.
1-4-2. Centering Adjustment
Mode Playback
Signal
Specified Value
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
± 4%
Adjustment method:
1) Use the centering adjustment ring and adjust so that the left, light, top, and bottom sides of the display are uniform. (Refer to Fig. 5-1-14.)
Note:
As the centering position changes due to earth magnetism, rotate it 360
°
in the horizontal direction, and adjust with the center section of the modifying position.
θ
Holizontal line
±
1.5
°
θ
Specified value : The image should be within
±
1.5
°
of the holizontal line.
Fig. 5-1-13.
Aberration adjustment
Focus adjustment
DY tightening screw
±
4%
Adjustment value :
±
4%
Fig. 5-1-15.
±
4%
1-4-3. Focus Adjustment
Mode
Signal
Playback
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
Adjustment method:
1) Adjust the focus ring to obtain the optimum focus. (Refer to
Fig. 5-1-14.)
Centering adjustment
Fig. 5-1-14.
VF-129 BOARD
W901
RV904
F.B.T
RV903
C909
SOL901
CN902
IC901
5-22
1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Specified Value
Dot pattern b1 2
×
a1 b2 0.8
×
a2
Adjustment method:
1) Adjust the aberration adjustment ring so that the tracing of the dot satisfies the specified value.
2) If the centering becomes displaced here, perform the centering adjustment from the beginning again.
a2 b2 a1 b1
1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board)
Mode Playback
Signal
Adjusting Element
Specified Value
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
C909 (SOL901)
12 ± 6%
Adjustment method:
1) Rotate RV903, and adjust the top and bottom side of the monoscope image to the top and bottom edges of the display.
2) Rotate RV904 so that the brightness is the normal level.
3) Solder or unsolder SOL901 pattern of the H size adjustment capacitor (C909) to “short” or “open”, so that the horizontal direction over scan becomes 12 ± 6% (Left and right totals).
100%
6% 6%
Fig. 5-1-16.
VF-129 BOARD
W901
RV904
F.B.T
12.5%
SOL901
Open
Short
Size H
Small
Big
Fig. 5-1-17.
12.5%
RV903
C909
SOL901
CN902
IC901
5-23
1-4-6. Vertical Amplitude Adjustment (VF-129 board)
Mode Playback
Signal
Adjusting Element
Specified Value
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
RV903
10 ± 3%
Adjustment method:
1) Adjust RV903 so that the vertical direction over scan becomes
10 ± 3% (Top and bottom totals).
5% 16.5%
1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment (VF-129 board)
Mode Playback
Signal
Adjusting Element
Alignment tape :
For checking system operation
(WR5-5ND(NTSC))
(WR5-5CD(PAL))
Monoscope section
RV904
Adjustment method:
1) Rotate RV904, and adjust so that the bright/dark sections of gray scale are displayed correctly. (The bright section should be unsatisfactory till the cross hatch appears vague in the monoscope circle. The dark section should be unsatisfactory till the darkest section of the gray scale cannot be differentiate.)
5% 16.5%
100%
1-4-8. Horizontal Amplitude, Vertical Amplitude, Focus
Check
“1-4-5. Horizontal Amplitude Adjustment” and “1-4-6. Vertical
Amplitude Adjustment” should be both satisfy the specified values.
If not, perform the adjustments from the beginning again. In this case, perform “1-4-7. Brightness Adjustment” again.
Moreover, check the focus, and if it found to be vague, perform “1-
4-3. Focus Adjustment” and “1-4-4. Aberration Adjustment”.
Fig. 5-1-18.
5-24
1-5.
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note 1:
The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to avoid electrical shock.
Note 2:
When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity.
Note 3:
Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center.
Set the LCD COLOR (Menu display) to the center.
Note 4:
Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter
(8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the
L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig for BX/BK.
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are concentrated in CN5502 of the PD-131 board. Connect the measuring instruments via the multi CPC jig (J-6082-311-A). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN5502.
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
Signal Name
VB
VG
VR
C-SYNC/XHD
GND
Table. 5-1-8.
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
Signal Name
XVD OUT
PANEL COM/PSIG
PANEL ID
XHD OUT
GND
PD-131 board
1. LCD Initial Data Input (1)
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
No signal
C
AB to BA
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: C, and input the data in the following table.
Note:
To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
B2
B3
B4
B5
Address
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
Data
53
00
90
CB
66
26
00
00
20
0A
24
1A
08
17
21
23
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Table 5-1-9.
Remark
CN5502
9
10
1
2
5-25
2. LCD Initial Data Input (2)
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
No signal
D
A0 to B1
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, and input the data in the following table.
Note:
To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Address
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
Data
80
20
00
80
78
A4
80
70
80
80
30
00
0A
0E
9F
1F
FC
FF
Fixed data
Fixed data
VCO adj.
Fixed data
V-COM adj.
RGB AMP adj.
Fixed data
COM AMP adj.
White balance adj.
White balance adj.
Contrast adj.
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
Remark
Table 5-1-10.
3. VCO Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred.
Mode
Signal
VTR stop
No signal
Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN5502 (XHD OUT)
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
D
A2, A3 f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC) f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 D A2
3
4
D
D
A2
A2
Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Read the data, and this data is named D
A2
.
5
6
7
8
9
D
0
Convert D
A2
to decimal notation, and obtain D
A2
’. (Note)
Calculate D
A3
’ using following equations (Decimal calculation)
NTSC model
When D
A2
’ 232
D
A3
’=D
A2
’+23
When D
A2
’>232
D
A3
’=255
PAL model
When D
A2
’ 20
D
A3
’= D
A2
’–20
When D
A2
’< 20
D
A3
’= 0
Convert D
A3
’ to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D
A3
. (Note)
A3 D
A3
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
01 00 Set the data.
Note:
Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.
5-26
4. RGB AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish).
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
VTR stop
No signal
Pin 3 of CN5502 (VG)
External trigger: Pin 4 of CN5502
(PANEL COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
A5
A = 2.80 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
A5
3
4
D
0
A5
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the voltage
(A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversed waveform pedestal to the specified value.
(The data should be “00” to “3F”)
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
VTR stop
No signal
Pin 3 of CN5502 (VG)
External trigger: Pin 4 of CN5502
(PANEL COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
AA
A = 2.80 ± 0.07V
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
AA
3
4
D
0
AA
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the voltage
(A) between the 100 IRE and 0 IRE
(pedestal) to the specified value.
(The data should be “00” to “7F”.)
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
Pedestal
100 IRE
A
A
Pedestal
2H
Fig. 5-1-19.
0 IRE
2H
Fig. 5-1-20.
5-27
6. COM AMP Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the specified value.
Mode
Signal
VTR stop
No signal
Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN5502 (PANEL COM)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
D
A7
A = 5.40 ± 0.05V (NTSC)
A = 5.35 ± 0.05V (PAL)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 D A7
3
4
D
0
A7
01
Change the data and set the
PANEL COM signal level (A) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
A
7. V-COM Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines.
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
VTR stop
No signal
Check on LCD display
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
D
A4
The brightness difference between the section A and section B is minimum.
Note:
This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the following adjustments.
RGB AMP Adjustment
Contrast Adjustment
COM AMP Adjustment
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
A4
3
4
5
D
D
0
A4
A4
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and that of the section B is equal.
Subtract 8 from the data.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
2H
Fig. 5-1-21.
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
B
Fig. 5-1-22.
5-28
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-131 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument
VTR stop
No signal
Check on LCD screen
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
D
A8, A9
The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1:
Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC5501
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 D A8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
0
A9
A9
A8
A8
A9
A9
A9
01
80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10.
Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored.
Press PAUSE button.
If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 5 to 9.
00 Set the data.
5-29
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
Mechanism Section adjustments, checks, and replacement of mechanism parts, refer to the separate volume “8mm Video
Mechanical Adjustment Manual IX M2000 Mechanism ”.
2-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter
(8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig for
BX/BK.
2-2.
HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander.
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to the ON position.
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0C, and press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
(The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note:
The function buttons becomes inoperable.
5) To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be sure to quit following this procedure.)
2-3.
HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE
WITHOUT CASSETTE
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander.
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to the ON position.
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0B, and press the
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
(The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.)
Note:
The function buttons becomes inoperable.
5) To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data:
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode, be sure to quit following this procedure.)
TG1
TG2
TG3 TG4 TG5
Drum
TG6
Capstan shaft
TG7
Pinch roller
T reel
S reel
Fig. 5-2-1.
5-30
2-4.
TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
2-4-1.
Preparations for Adjustment
1) Clean the tape path face (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft, pinch roller).
2) Connect the adjustment remote commander.
3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander.
4) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 08.
5) Connect the oscilloscope to CPC jig for BX/BK.
Channel 1: PB RF (MON)
Channel 2: SWP
Note:
Connect a 75
Ω
resistor between the test point PB RF (MON) and GND.
75
Ω
resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
6) Playback the SW/OL standard tape. (WR5-2D)
7) Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is flat at the entrance and exit.
If not flat, perform the following section 2-4-2. until it is flat.
8) Perform “Processing after operations”, after completing adjustment.
Test point of CPC jig for BX/BK
Pin No.
3
7
9
13
17
20
16
8
Signal Name
BL
EVF VG
PB RF (MON)
BPF MONI
TMS
TDI
SWP
CAP FG
Pin No.
1
5
10
15
19
18
14
Signal Name
EVF VCO
BL 4.75
GND
REC RF (RF IN)
TDO
TCK
IR VIDEO
Note:
Pin No. are those of CN1011 of VC-256 board.
Table 5-2-1.
[Processing after operations]
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander, and turn on the
HOLD switch.
2) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 00.
3) Remove the power supply from the unit.
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
Normal
Entrance side faulty
Exit side faulty
Fig. 5-2-2.
5-31
2-4-2.
Tape Path adjustment
1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape. (WR5-2D)
2) Turn the tape guide No.3 and No.6 alternately until the waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.)
Note:
Zenith adjustment screws for the TG3 and TG6 do not need to be adjusted.
[Entrance side adjustment]
3) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction until the waveform amplitude at the entrance side begins to become small. (Fig. 5-2-6. (A))
Confirm the rotation angle (A) of the No.3 guide.
4) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the counterclockwise direction until the waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.)
5) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the counterclockwise direction until the waveform amplitude at the entrance side begins to become small. (Fig. 5-2-6. (B))
Confirm the rotation angle (B) of the No.3 guide.
6) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction and set up in the angle (C) in the middle of the rotation angle (A) and the rotation angle (B). (Fig. 5-2-4.)
[Exit side adjustment]
7) Turn the No.6 guide slowly in the clockwise direction until the waveform amplitude at the exit side begins to become small.
(Fig. 5-2-7. (A))
Confirm the rotation angle (A) of the No.6 guide.
8) Turn the No.6 guide slowly in the counterclockwise direction until the waveform becomes flat. (Fig. 5-2-5.)
9) Turn the No.6 guide slowly in the counterclockwise direction until the waveform amplitude at the exit side begins to become small. (Fig. 5-2-7. (B))
Confirm the rotation angle (B) of the No.6 guide.
10) Turn the No.3 guide slowly in the clockwise direction and set up in the angle (C) in the middle of the rotation angle (A) and the rotation angle (B). (Fig. 5-2-4.)
No.6 guide
(TG6)
No.3 guide
(TG3)
Fig. 5-2-5.
Entrance side amplitude
Fig. 5-2-6. (A)
Entrance side amplitude
Fig. 5-2-6. (B)
Exit side amplitude
Guide zenith adjustment screw
Fig. 5-2-3.
C
B A
No.3 guide or
No.6 guide
Fig. 5-2-4.
5-32
Fig. 5-2-7. (A)
Exit side amplitude
Fig. 5-2-7. (B)
2-4-3.
No.7 Guide (TG7) Adjustment
1) Playback a tape in REV mode.
2) Confirm that tape slack dose not occur in between the guide
No.6 (TG6) 1 and capstan 2. If the tape slack is found, turn the height adjustment screw 4 of the Guide No.7 (TG7) 3 until tape slack is removed.
3) Playback a tape in normal mode. Confirm that tape slack dose not occur in between the guide No.7 (TG7) 3 and capstan 2.
(Specification = 0.5 mm or less) If the tape slack of more than
0.5 mm is found, turn the height adjustment screw 4 until the slack is 0.5 mm or less. Playback a tape in REV mode and confirm that tape slack occurred in between the guide No.6
(TG6) 1 and capstan 2 is 0.3 mm or less, the adjustment is complete.
2
Capstan
4
TG7 nut
1
No.6 guide
(TG6)
2-5.
CHECKS AFTER ADJUSTMENTS
2-5-1.
Waveform Build-up Check
1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape.
2) Eject the tape once, insert and load the tape.
3) Start playing back the tape and confirm that the RF waveform builds up in three seconds with flat envelope. Confirm at this time that tape slack dose not occur near pinch roller.
4) Playback the tape in CUE/REV and FF/REW modes respectively. Confirm that the RF waveform builds up in three seconds with flat envelope. Confirm at this time that tape slack dose not occur near pinch roller.
5) Repeat the check items 2) to 5) again.
No.7 guide
(TG7)
Capstan
No.6 guide
(TG6)
3
No.7 guide
(TG7)
Tape slack
Fig. 5-2-8.
2-4-4.
CUE, REV Waveforms Check
1) Playback the SW/OL standard tape (WR5-2D) in REV mode.
Confirm that pitches between the peaks of the waveform are equally spaced for 5 seconds or longer.
The pitches are not equally spaced, perform section “2-4-2.
Tape path Adjustment” and section “2-4-3. No.7 Guide (TG7)
Adjustment”.
2) Playback the SW/OL standard tape in CUE mode.
Confirm that pitches between the peaks of the waveform are equally spaced for 5 seconds or longer.
The pitches are not equally spaced, perform section “2-4-2.
Tape path Adjustment”.
Tape slack
Fig. 5-2-10.
2-5-2.
Tape Path Check
1) Insert a thin video tape such as P6-120MP (NTSC) or P5-
120MP (PAL). Playback the thin tape. Confirm that there is no clearance or curl of 0.3 mm or more at the following points:
Upper flange of guide No.3, upper flange of guide No. 6, upper and lower flanges of guide No.7,
2) Confirm that there is no clearance or curl of 0.3 mm or more at each tape guide when the FF button is pressed from the playback mode to enter the CUE mode, and when the REW button is pressed from the playback mode to enter the REV mode.
a b c d
No.7 guide
(TG7)
Pinch roller
No.6 guide
(TG6)
Drum
No.1 guide
(TG1)
No.3 guide
(TG3)
Fig. 5-2-9.
Capstan
Fig. 5-2-11.
5-33
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT
3-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section adjustments.
3-1-1.
Equipment to Required
1) TV monitor
2) Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band width above 30 MHz with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1 probe.)
3) Frequency counter
4) Pattern generator with video output terminal
5) Digital voltmeter
6) Audio generator
7) Audio level meter
8) Audio distortion meter
9) Audio attenuator
10) Regulated power supply
11) Digital8 alignment tapes
• SW/OL standard (WR5-2D)
Parts code: 8-967-993-22
• Audio operation check for NTSC (WR5-3ND)
Parts code: 8-967-993-32
• System operation check for NTSC (WR5-5ND)
Parts code: 8-967-993-42
• Audio operation check for PAL (WR5-3CD)
Parts code: 8-967-993-37
• System operation check for PAL (WR5-5CD)
Parts code: 8-967-993-47
12) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
13) CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A)
14) IR receiver jig (J-6082-383-A) *1
15) Media converter (DVMC-DA1) *1
*1: NTSC model only.
5-34
3-1-2.
Precautions on Adjusting
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to CN1011 of VC-
256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of
CPC jig for BX/BK.
2) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode or camera mode.
To set to the VTR mode, set the power switch to “VCR or
PLAYER” or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using the adjustment remote commander (Note1).
To set to the Camera mode, set the power switch to “CAMERA” or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the adjustment remote commander (Note2).
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR
Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”.
(Note3)
3) The front panel block (MI-041 board, microphone unit, video light) need not be connected except during “IR transmitter adjustment (DCR-TRV130)”. To remove, disconnect the following connector.
MI-041 board CN1002 (24P 0.5mm)
4) As removing the cabinet (R) assembly (removing CN1007 of the VC-256 board) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (CF-1000 block BT101), data such as date, time, userset menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet (R) assembly has been removed, the selfdiagnosis data, data on history of use (total drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2, address: B0 to C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to AA and E0 to E2). (Refer to “5-4.Service Mode”.)
5) The cabinet (R) assembly (CF-1000 block, LCD block) need not be connected to operate the VTR block.(Note4) When removing the cabinet (R) assembly, disconnect the following connectors.
1. VC-256 board CN1007 (24P, 0.5mm)
2. VC-256 board CN1003 (20P, 0.8mm)
6) The lens block (CD-281 board) need not be connected. To remove, disconnect the following connectors.
1. VC-256 board CN1501 (14P, 0.5mm)
2. VC-256 board CN1551 (24P, 0.5mm)
7) The EVF block (VF-129 board) need not be connected. To remove, disconnect the following connectors.
VC-256 board CN1006 (4P, 1.0mm)
8) By setting the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” or “Forced
Camera Power ON mode”, the video section can be operate even if the control switch block (SS-1000) has been removed.
When removing the control switch block (SS-1000), disconnect the following connector.
VC-256 board CN1009 (5P 0.8mm)
Note1:
Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (VTR mode)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE button.
The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on with the control switch block (SS-1000) removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR
Power ON mode”.
Note2:
Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (Camera mode)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on with the control switch block (SS-1000) removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera
Power ON mode”.
Note3:
Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Note4:
When the FK-1000 block or the CF-1000 block/CF-077 board is removed, the VTR does an unusual movement for one after the power is turned on.
5-35
3-1-3.
Adjusting Connectors
Some of the adjusting points of the video section are concentrated in CN1011 of VC-256 board. Connect the Measuring instruments and the adjustment remote commander via the CPC jig for BX/BK
(J-6082-521-A) to CN1011. To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adapter to the DC IN jack of
CPC jig for BX/BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig for BX/BK.
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1011.
Pin No.
9
11
13
15
5
7
1
3
17
19
Signal Name
VCO
EVF BL
EVF BL 4.75V
EVF VG
PB RF
REG GND
BPF MONI
REC RF
NC
NC
Table 5-3-1.
Pin No.
10
12
14
16
6
8
2
4
18
20
Signal Name
XLANC POWER ON
LANC IN
LANC OUT
CAP FG
REG GND
REG GND
IR VIDEO
RF SWP
NC
NC
The following table shows the arrangement of the test points of
CPC jig for BX/BK. (Pin No. are those of CN1011.)
Pin No.
Signal Name Pin No.
Signal Name
3
7
BL
EVF VG
1
5
EVF VCO
BL 4.75
9
13
17
20
16
8
PB RF (MON)
BPF MONI
TMS
TDI
SWP
CAP FG
10
15
19
18
14
GND
REC RF (RF IN)
TDO
TCK
IR VIDEO
Table 5-3-2.
3-1-4.
Connecting the Equipment
Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-2 and perform the adjustments.
CN1011
1 2
19 20
Fig. 5-3-1.
VIDEO
(Yellow)
TV monitor
Adjustment remote commander
LANC jack
Main unit
A/V OUT jack
AUDIO (Black)
Fig. 5-3-2.
Remove the
CPC lid
5-36
3-1-5.
Alignment Tape
The following table lists alignment tapes which are available.
Use the tape specified in the signal column for each adjustment. If the type of tape to be used for checking operations is not specified, use whichever type.
Digital8 alignment tape
Name Usage
SW/OL standard
(WR5-2D)
Switching position adjustment
Audio operation check Audio system adjustment
(WR5-3ND),
System operation check Operation check
(WR5-5ND)
Fig.5-3-3. shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment tape.
Note:
Measure using the VIDEO terminal (Terminated at 75
Ω
).
For NTSC model
White (100%)
White (75%)
1V
0.714V
0.286V
Q
I
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform
For PAL model
White (100%)
Burst signal
0.286V
(75%)
Q I Black
White
(100%)
Color bar pattern
0.7V
1V
0.3V
0.3V
(100%)
Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform
Fig. 5-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes
3-1-6.
Output Level and Impedance
Video output
Stereo minijack,
1Vp-p, 75
Ω
, unbalanced, sync negative
S video output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal:
1Vp-p, 75
Ω
, unbalanced, sync negative
Chrominance signal:
0.286Vp-p, 75
Ω
, unbalanced (NTSC)
0.300Vp-p, 75
Ω
, unbalanced (PAL)
Audio output
Stereo minijack:
–7.5dBs, (at load impedance 47k
Ω
), impedance less than
2.2k
Ω
5-37
Color bar pattern
3-2.
SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. Initialization of C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data
If the C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data is erased due to some reason, perform
“1-2. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA”, of “5-1.
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT”.
2. Serial No. Input
2-1. Company ID Input
Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory).
Page
Address
C
E8, E9, EA, EB, EC
Input method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E8 to EC.
Note:
Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
Address
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
Data
08
00
46
01
02
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2-2. Serial No. Input
Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM.
Page
Address
C
ED, EE, EF
Input method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D
1
.
Example: If the serial No. is 77881.
D
1
=77881
Note:
Use six digits of the low rank when a serial No. is more than seven digits.
3) Obtain D
2
and H
1
corresponding to D
1
from Table 5-3-3.
Example: If D
1
is “77881”.
D
2
=D
1
–65536=12345
H
1
=FE
H
1
(Hexadecimal)
D
1
(Decimal) D
2
(Decimal)
(Service model code)
000001 to 065535
065536 to 131071
131072 to 196607
D
D
D
1
1
1
–65536
–131072
FE
FE
FE
Table 5-3-3.
4) Input H
1
to page: C, address: ED. (Model code input)
Example: If H
1
is “FE”.
Select page: C, address: ED, set data: FE, and press the PAUSE button.
5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D
2
from Table 5-
3-4, and take this as D
3
.
Example: If D
2
is “12345”.
D
3
=12288
6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D
3
from Table 5-3-4, and take this as H
3
.
Example: If D
3
is “12288”.
H
3
=3000
7) Obtain the difference D
4
between D
2
and D
3
. (Decimal calculation, 0 D
4
255)
D
4
= D
2
–D
3
Example: If D
2
is “12345” and D
3
is “12288”.
D
4
=12345–12288=57
8) Convert D
4
to hexadecimal, and take this as H
4
.
(Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “5-4.
Service Mode”.)
Example: If D
4
is “57”.
H
4
=39
9) Input the upper 2 digits of H
3
to page: C, address: EE.
Example: If H
3
is “3000”.
Select page: C, address: EE, set data: 30, and press the PAUSE button.
10) Input H
4
to page: C, address: EF.
Example: If H
4
is “39”.
Select page: C, address: EF, set data: 39, and press the PAUSE button.
11) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-38
4864
5120
5376
5632
5888
6144
6400
6656
2816
3072
3328
3584
3840
4096
4352
4608
6912
7168
7424
7680
7936
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
Decimal
(D
3
)
Hexadecimal
(H
3
)
1024
1280
1536
1792
0
256
512
768
2048
2304
2560
0000
0100
0200
0300
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
0A00
8192
8448
8704
8960
9216
9472
9728
9984
10240
10496
10752
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
2600
2700
2800
2900
2A00
16384
16640
16896
17152
17408
17664
17920
18176
18432
18688
18944
4000
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
4A00
24576
24832
25088
25344
25600
25856
26112
26368
26624
26880
27136
6000
6100
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
6700
6800
6900
6A00
32768
33024
33280
33536
33792
34048
34304
34560
34816
35072
35328
8000
8100
8200
8300
8400
8500
8600
8700
8800
8900
8A00
40960
41216
41472
41728
41984
42240
42496
42752
43008
43264
43520
A000
A100
A200
A300
A400
A500
A600
A700
A800
A900
AA00
49152
49408
49664
49920
50176
50432
50688
50944
51200
51456
51712
C000
C100
C200
C300
C400
C500
C600
C700
C800
C900
CA00
57344
57600
57856
58112
58368
58624
58880
59136
59392
59648
59904
E000
E100
E200
E300
E400
E500
E600
E700
E800
E900
EA00
13056
13312
13568
13824
14080
14336
14592
14848
11008
11264
11520
11776
12032
12288
12544
12800
15104
15360
15616
15872
16128
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
1A00
0B00
0C00
0D00
0E00
0F00
1000
1100
1200
1B00
1C00
1D00
1E00
1F00
21248
21504
21760
22016
22272
22528
22784
23040
19200
19456
19712
19968
20224
20480
20736
20992
23296
23552
23808
24064
24320
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
3900
3A00
2B00
2C00
2D00
2E00
2F00
3000
3100
3200
3B00
3C00
3D00
3E00
3F00
29440
29696
29952
30208
30464
30720
30976
31232
27392
27648
27904
28160
28416
28672
28928
29184
31488
31744
32000
32256
32512
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
5A00
4B00
4C00
4D00
4E00
4F00
5000
5100
5200
5B00
5C00
5D00
5E00
5F00
37632
37888
38144
38400
38656
38912
39168
39424
35584
35840
36096
36352
36608
36864
37120
37376
39680
39936
40192
40448
40704
7300
7400
7500
7600
7700
7800
7900
7A00
6B00
6C00
6D00
6E00
6F00
7000
7100
7200
7B00
7C00
7D00
7E00
7F00
45824
46080
46336
46592
46848
47104
47360
47616
43776
44032
44288
44544
44800
45056
45312
45568
47872
48128
48384
48640
48896
9300
9400
9500
9600
9700
9800
9900
9A00
8B00
8C00
8D00
8E00
8F00
9000
9100
9200
9B00
9C00
9D00
9E00
9F00
54016
54272
54528
54784
55040
55296
55552
55808
51968
52224
52480
52736
52992
53248
53504
53760
56064
56320
56576
56832
57088
B300
B400
B500
B600
B700
B800
B900
BA00
AB00
AC00
AD00
AE00
AF00
B000
B100
B200
BB00
BC00
BD00
BE00
BF00
62208
62464
62720
62976
63232
63488
63744
64000
60160
60416
60672
60928
61184
61440
61696
61952
64256
64512
64768
65024
65280
D300
D400
D500
D600
D700
D800
D900
DA00
CB00
CC00
CD00
CE00
CF00
D000
D100
D200
DB00
DC00
DD00
DE00
DF00
F300
F400
F500
F600
F700
F800
F900
FA00
EB00
EC00
ED00
EE00
EF00
F000
F100
F200
FB00
FC00
FD00
FE00
FF00
Table 5-3-4.
5-39
3-3.
SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that the specified value of “27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of
“VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied.
Adjusting Procedure:
1.
REEL FG adjustment
2.
Cap FG duty adjustment
3.
PLL fo & LPF fo pre-adjustment
4.
Switching position adjustment
5.
AGC center level
6.
APC & AEQ adjustment
7.
PLL fo & LPF fo fine adjustment
1. REEL FG Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Compensates the dispersion of the hall elements.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
17, 30
00 or 01 or 04 or 05
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
3
3
3
0
01
01
02
03
01
Procedure
Close the cassette compartment without inserting a cassette.
01 Set the data.
1C Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“00”,
Check that the data is “00” or
“01” or “04” or “05”. (Note)
00 Set the data.
Note:
If the data is other value, adjustment has errors. (Take an appropriate remedial measures according to the errors referring to the following table.)
Data
02, 03, 06, 07
08, 09, 0C, 0D
0A, 0B, 0E, 0F
Contents of defect
T reel is defective
S reel is defective
S reel and T reel are defective
2. CAP FG Duty Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise can occur in the SLOW playback mode.
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
Playback without cassette
No signal
Display data of page: 6, address: 02
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified value
64
01
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
D
8
8
6
6
6
6
01
10
0A
2A
01
01
02
01
Procedure
Close the cassette compartment without inserting a cassette.
01 Set the data.
12 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
FD Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
C8 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set to the playback mode without cassette.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
81 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“01” within 6 seconds. If not, return to step 7.
00 Set the data, press PAUSE button.
11
12
13
14
D
8
8
0
10
0A
2A
01
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
FF Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
5-40
3. PLL fo & LPF fo Pre-Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
C
1F, 20, 22, 29
Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”.
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
3
01
01
01
Procedure
Set the data.
30 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3
4
5
3
3
0
02
03
01
Check that the data changes to
“00” within 10 sec. (Note)
Check that the data is “00”. (Note)
00 Set the data.
Note:
If it isn’t satisfied, select page: C, address: 21, set the following data, and press the PAUSE button, and repeat steps 2 to 4.
Setting data
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “CA”.
CE
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “CE”.
C6
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “C6”.
D2
When the data of page: C, address: 21 is “D2” C2
If bit2, bit3, bit4, bit5 or bit6 of page: 3, address: 03 data is “1”, there are errors.
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
Error contents Bit value of page: 3, address: 03 data bit 2 = 1 or bit 3 = 1 bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1 bit 6 = 1
PLL fo fine adjustment is defective
PLL fo adjustment is defective
LPF fo is defective
4. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
To obtain normal playback waveform output during the Digital8 playback mode, adjust the switching position.
Mode
Signal
VTR playback
SW/OL reference tape (WR5-2D)
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
C
10, 11, 12, 13
00
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
3
3
3
3
C
0
01
21
01
02
03
10
01
Procedure
Insert the SW/OL reference tape and enter the VTR STOP mode.
01 Set the data.
Check that the data is “02”.
(Note1)
0D Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“00”.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
Check that the data is “00” to “E6”.
(Note3)
00 Set the data.
Note 1:
If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played.
After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 4 and higher.
Note 2:
If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the A channel is defective. If bit 1 is “1”, the B channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written into page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”. ) If bit3 of the data is “1”, the tape end being played, and adjustment has errors.
Note 3:
If the data is “E7” to “FF”, adjustment has errors.
When the A channel is defective
Data of page:C, address:10
EE
Contents of defect
Writing into EEPROM (IC4502) is defective
E8
E7
Adjustment data is out of range
No data is returned from IC3301
(CAIN)
When the B channel is defective
Data of page:C, Contents of defect address:12
E8 Adjustment data is out of range
E7 No data is returned from IC3301
(CAIN)
5-41
5. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment
5-1. Preparations before adjustments
Mode
Subject
Camera recording
Arbitrary
Note:
Use a Hi8 MP tape.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
0
8
01
2A
01
C8
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data.
Record the camera signal for three minutes.
5-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
Playback
Recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments”
PB RF (MON) (Pin 9 of CN1011) (Note 1)
Ext. trigger: SWP (Pin qh of CN1011)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
1E
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”
Note 1:
Connect a 75
Ω
resistor between PB RF (MON) and GND of CPC jig.
75
Ω
resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
3
4
0
2
3
01
2E
33
Procedure
Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before adjustments”
01 Set the data.
01 Set the data.
08 Set the data.
5
6
7
8
9
3
3
3
01
02
03
Confirm that the playback RF signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-4.)
23 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data is “00”.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
Perform “APC & AEQ Adjustment”.
Note 2:
If the data of page: 3, address: 03 is other than “00”, adjustment has errors.
PB RF signal is stable
5-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Mode
Signal
Measurement Point
Playback
Recorded signal at “Preparations before adjustments”
PB RF (MON) (Pin 9 of CN1011) (Note 1)
Ext. trigger: SWP (Pin qh of CN1011)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
18, 19, 1B, 1C, 21, 2C
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”
Note 1:
Connect a 75
Ω
resistor between PB RF (MON) and GND of CPC jig.
75
Ω
resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note 2:
The “AGC Center Level Adjustment” must have already been completed before starting this adjustment.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
4
5
2
3
C
C
C
C
18
19
1B
1C
25
25
25
25
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
6
7
8
C
C
21
2C
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
3
3
3
3
2E
33
01
02
03
CA Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
03 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before adjustments”
01
08 Set the data.
Confirm that the playback RF signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-5.)
07 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes from
“07” to “00” in about 20 seconds after pressing PAUSE button.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
Perform “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.
Note 3:
If the data is other than “00”, adjustment has errors.
PB RF signal is stable
PB RF PB RF
SWP SWP
6.6 msec
Fig. 5-3-4.
6.6 msec
Fig. 5-3-5.
5-42
5-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments
Order Page Address Data
3
4
1
2
0
2
3
8
01
2E
33
2A
5 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
00 Set the data.
00 Set the data.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
6. PLL fo & LPF fo Fine Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Display data of page: 3
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
1F, 20, 22, 29
The data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”.
The data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
3
01
01
3
4
3
3
02
03
Procedure
01 Set the data.
30 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the data changes to
“00” within 10 sec.
Check that the data is “00”.
(Note)
5 0 01 00 Set the data.
Note:
If bit2, bit3, bit4, bit5 or bit 6 of the data is “1”, there are errors.
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”. )
Bit value of page: 3, address: 03 bit 2 = 1 or bit 3 = 1 bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1 bit 6 = 1
Error contents
PLL fo fine adjustment is defective
PLL fo adjustment is defective
LPF fo is defective
5-43
3-4.
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1. 27MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment
(VC-256 Board)
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization.
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will become inconsistent.
Mode Camera
Subject
Measurement Point
Not required
FB1502 (Pin qs of IC1501) or
Pin qh of IC1502
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
4D f=13500000 ± 68Hz
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
F
01
4D
3
4
F
0
4D
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Change the data and set the frequency (f) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
VC-256 BOARD
IC1501
36
37
25
24
48
1
12
13
FB1502
IC1502
36
37
25
24
48
1
13
12
2. Chroma BPF fo Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Set the center frequency of IC3701 chroma band-pass filter.
Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal
Measurement Point CH1: Chroma signal terminal of S
VIDEO OUT jack (75
Ω
terminated)
CH2: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO
OUT jack (75
Ω
terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
C
28
A = 100mVp-p or less
B = 200mVp-p or more
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
C
C
3
D
0
0C
28
28
0C
11
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
10 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the burst signal (B) is output to the chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO OUT jack.
04 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Change the data for minimum amplitude of the burst signal level (A).
(The data should be “00” to “07”.)
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
Fig. 5-3-6.
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 04:
A
CH1
CH2
H
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 00:
CH1 B
H
Fig. 5-3-7.
5-44
3. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal
Measurement Point Y signal terminal of S VIDEO OUT jack (75
Ω
terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
C
25
A = 1000 ± 20mV
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
11
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
C
C
3
D
0
0C
25
25
0C
11
01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
10 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
02 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Change the data and set the Y signal level (A) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
H
Center of luminance line
Fig. 5-3-8.
A
4. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
(VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO
OUT jack (75
Ω
terminated)
External trigger: Y signal terminal of
S VIDEO OUT jack
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
26, 27
Cr level: A = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
A = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
Cb level: B = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
B = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
Burst level: C = 286 ± 6mV (NTSC)
C = 300 ± 6mV (PAL)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
2 D 11
3 3 0C
10 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
02 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C
C
C
C
3
D
0
26
26
27
27
0C
11
01
Change the data and set the Cr signal level (A) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Change the data and set the Cb signal level (B) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Check that the burst signal level
(C) is satisfied the specified value.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
H
C
5-45
A
0.28
µ sec
Fig. 5-3-9.
0.28
µ sec
B
5. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-256 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack
(75
Ω
terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Specified Value Sync level: A = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
A = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)
Burst level: B = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
B = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
D
01
11
3
4
5
6
3
3
0C
0C
Procedure
01 Set the data.
10 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
02 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
7
8
D
0
11
01
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
B
A
H
Fig. 5-3-10.
5-46
3-5.
IR TRANSMITTER ADJUSTMENTS
(DCR-TRV130)
Adjust using the IR receiver jig (J-6082-383-A).
Note:
If the distance between the IR receiver jig and the camcorder is below 1m, cover the LASER LINK emitter with a ND filter. (For example, when the distance is 30cm to 50cm, cover the LASER
LINK emitter with a ND filter 1.0.)
Switch setting:
SUPER LASER LINK ........................... ON (Red LED is lit)
1. IR Video Carrier Frequency Adjustment
(MI-041 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Pin 5 of CN003 of IR receiver jig (RF)
(Or Pin qh of IC3901 of MI-041 board)
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
F
80 f = 11.85 ± 0.05 MHz (*1) f = 11.55 ± 0.05 MHz (*2)
*1: IC3901 of MI-041 board is LA9511.
*2: IC3901 of MI-041 board is AN2920.
Connection of Equipment:
Connect the measuring device as shown in the following figure, and adjust.
Main unit
IR receiver jig
Pin
5
of
CN003
Frequency counter
Fig. 5-3-11.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
3
01
0C
01
Procedure
Set the data.
08 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3 F 80
4
5
6
F
3
0
80
0C
01
Change the data, and set the video carrier frequency (f) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data.
2. IR Video Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board)
Mode
Signal
VTR stop
Arbitrary
Measurement Point VIDEO OUT terminal of IR receiver jig (Terminated at 75
Ω
)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
F
7E
A = 0.82 ± 0.05 V
Connection of Equipment:
Connect the measuring device as shown in the following figure, and adjust.
Oscilloscope
Main unit
IR receiver jig
VIDEO
OUT
75
Ω
75
Ω
(1-247-804-11)
Fig. 5-3-12.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0
3
01
0C
3
4
5
F
F
3
7E
7E
0C
Procedure
01 Set the data.
01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Change the data, set the video signal amplitude (A) to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
6 0 01 00 Set the data.
White
A
H
Fig. 5-3-13.
5-47
3. IR Audio Deviation Adjustment (MI-041 Board)
Mode VTR stop
Signal Video : Color bar, VIDEO IN jack of
DVMC-DA1
Audio : 400Hz, –7.5dBs, AUDIO IN
L and R jack of DVMC-DA1
Measurement Point AUDIO L terminal and AUDIO R terminal of IR receiver jig
(Terminated at 47k
Ω
)
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
7F
Signal level: –7.5 ± 1.0 dBs
Level difference of L and R: Below
2dB
Connection of Equipment:
Connect the measuring device as shown in the following figure, and adjust.
Pattern generator
VIDEO OUT
(75
Ω
)
Media converter
DVMC-DA1
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
DV
IN/OUT
DV
IN/OUT
Main unit IR receiver jig
L
AUDIO OUT
R
Audio oscillator
Attenuator
Audio Left
(White)
Audio Right
(Red)
600
Ω
600
Ω
: 270
Ω
(1-249-410-11) + 330
Ω
(1-249-411-11)
Audio level meter
47k
Ω
47k
Ω
(1-249-437-11)
Fig. 5-3-14.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2
0 01
3
4
5
F
F
7F
7F
Procedure
01 Set the data.
Connect the audio level meter to the AUDIO L terminal of the IR receiver jig.
Change the data and set the
400Hz audio signal level to the specified value.
Press PAUSE button.
Connect the audio level meter to the AUDIO R terminal of the IR receiver jig.
6
7
F
0
7F
01
Check that the 400Hz audio signal level is within the specified value. If outside, repeat from step 2.
00 Set the data.
5-48
3-6.
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
[Connecting the measuring instruments for the audio]
Connect the audio system measuring instruments in addition to the video system measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-15.
Playback
Main unit
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Video (Yellow)
TV monitor
Left (White)
47k
Ω
Audio level meter or Distortion meter
Right
(Red)
47k
Ω
47k
Ω
(1-249-437-11)
1. Playback Level Check
Mode Playback
Signal Digital8 alignment tape:
For audio operation check
(WR5-3ND (NTSC), WR5-3CD (PAL))
AUDIO/VIDEO jack left or right Measurement Point
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter and frequency counter
Specified Value 32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs
44.1 kHz mode:
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level during EMP OFF.
Checking Method:
1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
Fig. 5-3-15.
5-49
5-4. SERVICE MODE
4-1.
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional communication with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory.
1. Using the Adjustment Remote Commander
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the CN1011 of
VC-256 board via CPC jig for BX/BK (J-6082-521-A). To operate the adjustment remote commander, connect the AC power adaptor (8.4Vdc) to the DC IN jack of CPC jig for BX/
BK, or connect the L series Info-LITHIUM battery to the battery terminal of CPC jig for BX/BK.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-4-1.
2. Precautions Upon Using the Adjustment Remote Commander
Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
Page Data Address
Fig. 5-4-1.
3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.
• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal notation
LCD Display
Decimal notation conversion value
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
• Changing the address
The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment data (C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power supply (8.4 V) once.
5-50
4-2.
DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table
Lower digit of hexadecimal 1 2 3
Upper digit of hexadecimal
0
1
2
0
A
( A )
B
( b )
C
( c )
2
D
( d )
E
( E )
F
( F )
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32
1
33
2
34
3
35
4
4
36
5
5
37
6
6
38
7
7
39
8
8
40
9
9
41
10 11 12 13 14 15
42 43 44 45 46 47
5
6
7
8
3
4
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 77 76 77 78 79
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
1
A (
A
)
B ( b
)
C ( c
)
D ( d
)
E (
E
)
F (
F
)
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173
176
177
174 175
178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note:
The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example)
If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD ( bd
);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B ( b
), and the lower digit is D ( d
), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 5-4-1.
5-51
4-3.
SERVICE MODE
Additional note on adjustment
Note:
After the completion of the all adjustments, cancel the service mode by either of the following ways.
1) After data on page: D is restored, unplug the main power supply and remove the coin lithium battery. ( In this case, date and time and menu setting have been set by users are canceled. Perform resetting.)
2) After data on page: D is restored, select page: 0, address: 01, and return the data to 00. And when data on page:2 and 3 are changed, return data to the original condition.
1. Setting the Test Mode
Page D Address 10
Data
00
01
02
Normal
Function
Forced camera power ON
Forced VTR power ON
• Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data:
01.
• For page D, the data set will be recorded in the non-volatile memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off (8.4Vdc).
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data of page: D address: 10 to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. And select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2. Emergence Memory Address
2-1. C Page Emergence Memory Address
Page C Address F4 to FF
Address
F4
Contents
EMG code when first error occurs
F6
F7
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first error occurs
Lower: MSW code when first error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error occurs
F8
FA
FB
FC
FE
FF
EMG code when second error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second error occurs
Lower: MSW code when second error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error occurs
EMG code when last error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error occurs
Lower: MSW code when last error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error occurs
When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address
(F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address
(F8 to FB).
Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding to the error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF).
Note :
After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of addresses F4 to FF to “00”.
Initializing method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
5-52
2-2. EMG Code (Emergency Code)
Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in C page, addresses F4, F8 and FC (or F page, addresses 10, 14 and 18).
The type of error indicated by the code are shown in the following table.
Code
00
10
No error
Emergency Type
Loading motor emergency during loading
11
22
23
Loading motor emergency during unloading
T reel emergency during normal rotation
S reel emergency during normal rotation
T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel
24
30
40
42 terminal and T reel terminal)
FG emergency at the start up of the capstan
FG emergency at the start up of the drum
FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
5-53
2-3. MSW Code
• The lower parts of the data of C page, addresses F6, FA and FE represent the MSW codes (mode switch mechanism position) when errors occurs.
• The upper parts of the data of C page, addresses F6, FA and FE represent, when the mechanism position is to be moved, the MSW codes at the start movement (when moving the loading motor).
• The lower parts of the data of C page, addresses F7, FB and FF represent the MSW codes of the desired movement when the mechanism position is to be moved.
Mechanism position
MSB
MODE SW C
MODE SW B
MODE SW A
←
Unloading
EJECT
BL USE BL LOAD BL STOP
BL
TURN BL REC/PB BL
Loading
→
REW
LS chassis movement range
Pinch roller is detached
Releasing lock of cassette campartment
Pinch roller is pressed
Mechanism Position
EJECT
BL
USE
LOAD
STOP
TURN
REC/PB
REW
MSW Code
1
7
3
2
6
4
0
5
Contents
Position at which the cassette compartment lock is released. The mechanism will not move any further in the unloading direction.
BLANC code. Between two codes. The mechanism will not be stopped by this code while it is operating.
EJECT completion position. When the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this position.
Code during loading/unloading. Code that is used while the LS chassis is moving.
Normal stop position. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the brakes of both reels turn on.
Position at which is used when the pendulum gear swings from S to T or from T to S.
PB, REC, CUE, REV, PAUSE, FF positions.
The pinch roller is pressed and tension regulator is on.
REW position. REW are carried at this position.
The mechanism will not move any further in the loading direction.
5-54
3. Bit Value Discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjustment remote commander for the following items. Us the table below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”.
Display on the adjustment remote commander
Page
Address bit3 to bit0 discrimination bit7 to bit4 discrimination
(Example) If the remote commander display is “8E”, bit value from bit
7 to bit 4 can be discriminated from the column A, and those from bit 3 to bit 0 from column B.
A
B
Display on the adjustment remote commander
2
3
0
1
4
5
8
9
6
7
A ( A )
B ( b )
C ( C )
D ( d )
E ( E )
F (
F
) bit3 or bit7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4. Switch check (1)
Page 2 Address 43
Bit
0
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
Function
POWER SW (VTR MODE SW)(SS-1000 block)
POWER SW (CAM MODE SW)(SS-1000 block)
START/STOP SW (SS-1000 block)
EJECT SW (FK-1000 block)
CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis)
PHOTO SW (PHOTO FREEZE SW)(FK-1000 block)
When bit value = 1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF (UP)
OFF
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 43.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
When bit value = 0
ON (VCR or PLAYER)
ON (CAMERA)
ON
ON
ON (DOWN)
ON
5. Switch check (2)
Page 2 Address 49
Bit
6
7
Function
A/V OUT jack (FP-258 flexible)
S VIDEO jack (FP-258 flexible)
When bit value = 1
Used
Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 49.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
When bit value = 0
Not used
Used
6. Switch check (3)
Page 3 Address 5A
Bit
6
Function
HEADPHONE jack (CF-1000 block)
When bit value = 1
Used
Using method:
1) Select page: 3, address: 5A.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
When bit value = 0
Not used
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Bit values bit2 or bit6 bit1 or bit5
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0 bit0 or bit4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
5-55
7. Switch check (4)
Page 2 Address 60 to 65
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 65.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Address
00 to 0C
60
(KEY AD0)
SUPER
LASER LINK
(IC4803 od) (FK-1000)(S012)*1
61
(KEY AD1)
(IC4803 of)
62
(KEY AD2)
(IC4803 og)
63
(KEY AD3)
(IC4803 oh)
64
(KEY AD4)
(IC4803 oj)
65
(KEY AD5)
(IC4803 ok)
MENU
(CF-1000)
(S002)
TIME
(CF-1000)
(S003)
PANEL
REVERSE
(PR-10000)
0D to 24
LIGHT
(FK-1000)
(S002)
25 to 3F
STOP
(FK-1000)
(S005)
PHOTO
(PHOTO START)
(FK-1000)(S004)
EXPOSURE
(CF-1000)
(S004)
PAUSE
(FK-1000)
(S006)
MENU
EXECUTE
(CF-1000)(S007)
SUPER
NIGHT SHOT
(CF-1000)(S006)
END SEARCH
(CF-1000)
(S009)
40 to 5D
FF
(FK-1000)
(S007)
REW
(FK-1000)
(S008)
Data
5E to 81
REC
(FK-1000)
(S010,011)*2
PLAY
(FK-1000)
(S009)
VOLUME +
(CF-1000)
(S013)
DISPLAY
(CF-1000)
(S012)
*1: DCR-TRV130 (NTSC) model only
*2: Except AEP/UK model
82 to AA
VOLUME –
(CF-1000)
(S016)
FADER
(CF-1000)
(S022)
AB to D7
BACKLIGHT
(CF-1000)
(S018)
No key input
PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN
(S901) (S901)
FOCUS
(CF-1000)
(S019)
D8 to FF
No key input
No key input
No key input
PANEL
NORMAL
(PR-10000)
8. Record of Use check
Note:
When replacing the drum assembly, initialize the data of address: A2 to A4.
When replacing the video light, initialize the data of address: E0 to E2.
When replacing the EL-Back light, initialize the data of address: E3 to E5.
Page 2 Address A2 to AA, E0 to E5
Bit
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
E0
A2
A3
A4
A5
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Function
Drum rotation counted time
(BCD code)
User initial power on date
(BCD code)
Final condensation occurrence date
(BCD code)
Video light counted time
(BCD code)
EL-Back light counted time
(BCD code)
Minutes
Hour (L)
Hour (H)
Year
Month
Day
Year
Month
Day
Hour (H)
Hour (L)
Minutes
Hour (H)
Hour (L)
Minutes
Remarks
10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
After setting the clock, set the date of power on next
1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at page: 2, addresses: A2 to AA and E0 to E5.
Note:
This data will be erased (reset) when the cabinet (R) assembly (VC-256 board CN1007 (24P)) is removed.
Initializing method:
1) Using the adjustment remote commander, select the object address and set data: 00.
5-56
9. Record of Self-diagnosis check
Page 2 Address B0 to C6
BE
C0
C1
C2
B9
BA
BC
BD
Address
B0
B1
B2
B4
B5
B6
B8
C4
C5
C6
Self-diagnosis code
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 5th time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred the last time)
*1 : “01” t “C”, “03” t “E”
Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at page: 2, addresses: BC to C6. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for detail of the self-diagnosis code.
Note:
This data will be erased (reset) when the cabinet (R) assembly (VC-256 board CN1007 (24P)) is removed.
5-57E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied.
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
HK : Hong Kong model
AUS : Australian model
JE : Tourist model
CN : Chinese model
KR : Korea model
BR : Brazilian model
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
A
11
10
9
8
LAMP, HALOGEN
XB-3D (HL6V/3W) not supplied
7
6
B
14
13
A
1
not supplied
12
not supplied
6
1
6
6
Cabinet (L) section
(See page 6-2)
B
15
16
1
C
MI-041
1
5
19
MIC901
3
4
MIC902
2
C
6
Cabinet (R) section
(See page 6-5)
6
17
18
6
7
8
5
6
9
* 4
5
1
2
3
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
3-948-339-61 TAPPING
3-065-468-01 RETAINER (REAR), MICROPHONE
3-065-467-01 RETAINER (FRONT), MICROPHONE
3-065-470-01 CUSHION (10), MICROPHONE
X-3951-212-1 PANEL (10) ASSY, F (TRV130)
10
10
X-3951-220-1 PANEL (10) ASSY, F (TRV130E)
3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H)
1-518-723-21 LIGHT, VIDEO
X-3949-376-1 CAP (N) ASSY, LENS
3-065-433-01 COVER (10), JACK
Remarks
X-3951-192-1 CABINET L (10) ASSY
(TRV130/TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)
X-3951-194-1 CABINET L (10) ASSY (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
Ref. No.
11
* 12
* 13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
Part No.
Description
A-7074-711-A MI-041 (SI) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130)
3-987-717-01 SCREW, TRIPOD
1-475-141-61 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-814)
3-742-854-01 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-814)
3-065-464-01 WINDOW (12), LCD
MIC901 1-542-452-11 MICROPHONE (Rch)
MIC902 1-542-452-11 MICROPHONE (Lch)
Remarks
3-052-815-01 BELT (ES), GRIP
3-065-455-01 STOPPER (FRONT) (10), BELT
3-065-457-01 PLATE REAR (10), L GROUND
3-058-622-01 STOPPER (REAR), BELT
A-7074-709-A MI-041 (S) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION
58
I
63
62
not supplied
58
58
68
59
57
53
64
BT901
Mechanism deck
(See page 6-7 to 6-10)
D
E
B
A
C
71
66
53
F
H
55
53
53
67
61
not supplied
54
J
60
51
70
H
56
65
E
VC-256
Board
D
C
B
A
52
I
F
J
EVF section
(See page 6-3)
G
K
53
69
66
53
Lens section
(See page 6-4)
G
58
Ref. No.
51
* 52
53
54
* 55
56
57
58
59
59
Part No.
Description
1-680-203-11 FP-263 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-428-01 FRAME B (10), MD
3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
1-680-199-11 FP-258 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-429-01 FRAME (10), LENS
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
62
63
63
64
65
Description
1-476-423-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (SS-1000)
Remarks
(TRV130/TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)
X-3951-196-1 PANEL (12) ASSY, BATTERY
(TRV130:US,CND,E,HK,KR/TRV130E)
X-3951-471-1 PANEL (B) (12) ASSY, BATTERY (TRV130:BR)
3-987-656-01 LID, JACK
A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 4-974-725-01 SCREW (M1.7X2.5), P
X-3951-227-1 LID (12) ASSY, CASSETTE
3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H)
1-476-424-41 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000)
(TRV130E:AEP,UK)
1-476-424-61 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000)(TRV130)
66
67
68
69
70
3-948-339-61 TAPPING
1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING
59
60
61
62
1-476-424-71 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-1000)
(TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)
3-065-421-01 SHEET METAL (LOWER)(12), STRAP
3-066-169-01 SHEET, MD
1-476-423-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (SS-1000)
(TRV130E:AEP,UK)
71
BT901
3-066-949-01 CUSHION (12), JACK
1-694-384-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
6-2
6-1-3. EVF SECTION
112
108
not supplied
114
113
V901
109
107
103
106
103
111
110
102
104
105
103
101
Ref. No.
Part No.
101
102
103
104
105
Description
3-061-794-01 SCREW, LOOSE STOPPER
3-065-481-01 BASE B (12), VF
3-948-339-81 TAPPING
X-3950-230-1 HINGE ASSY, VF
3-065-480-01 CABINET LOWER B (12), EVF
106
107
108
3-053-681-01 TALLY, EVF
1-792-454-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-289)
A-7073-838-A VF-129 (N) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130)
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
108
109
110
111
112
Description Remarks
A-7073-855-A VF-129 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
X-3951-202-1 CABINET UPPER B (12) ASSY, EVF
3-975-898-01 SCREW (T), F LOCK
X-3949-329-1 FINDER (S) ASSY
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
113
114
3-709-272-01 COVER, HIGH VOLTAGE (SERVICE)
3-709-273-01 MASK, CRT (SERVICE)
0 V901
1-452-673-61 CRT ASSY (M01KXX90WB)
6-3
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-4. LENS SECTION
163
162
IC191
161
160
159
153
M906
158
157
156
155
154
152
155
154
not supplied
M905
153
152
151
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager.
Ref. No.
Part No.
151
152
153
154
155
Description
8-848-729-01 DEVICE, LENS LSV-630A
X-3949-355-2 IRIS FLEXIBLE ASSY 630
3-713-791-41 SCREW, TAPPING (M1.7X5), P2
3-713-791-51 SCREW, TAPPING (M1.7X3.5), P2
3-056-022-01 TAPPING (B1.7X3.5), HEAD
156
157
158
159
3-053-827-01 LEVER, IR
3-053-800-01 SPRING, RETAIN
3-053-799-01 GEAR, IR
3-978-981-11 ADAPTOR (FK), CCD FITTING
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
160
161
161
162
163
Description
1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E)
3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130)
A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE
3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING
Remarks
IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130)
IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E)
M905 1-763-262-11 MOTOR, STEPPING F630 (FOCUS)
M906 1-763-046-21 MOTOR, STEPPING Z600 (ZOOM)
6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION
LCD section
(See page 6-6)
203
209
204
205
201
201
C
B
201
202
A
B
C
207
208
201
S901
D901
LCD902
206
201
: BT001 (Lithium battary) CF-1000 on the mount position. (See page 4-27)
The printed wiring board of the Control switch block (CF-1000) on which lithium battery is mounted, is not shown.]
A
Ref. No.
Part No.
201
202
203
204
205
Description
3-948-339-61 TAPPING
3-065-436-01 BLIND (12), HINGE
1-476-425-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (CF-1000)
X-3951-223-1 CABINET R (12) ASSY
3-059-539-11 LID (103P), CPC
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
207
208
209
Description
1-680-201-11 FP-260 FLEXIBLE BOARD
1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295)
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
0 D901 1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS
LCD902 1-804-272-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
206 3-065-451-01 HOLDER (12), LCD S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH
Remarks
6-5
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-6. LCD SECTION
255
256
257
259
260
258
254
253
C
A
PD-131
Board
261
262
252
266
251
C
264
B
A
263
B
ND901
LCD901
265
Ref. No.
Part No.
251
252
* 253
254
255
Description
3-067-347-01 MI SCREW M2 (H)
3-065-474-01 CABINET C (12), P
3-058-672-01 CLAMP, HARNESS
3-948-339-31 SCREW, TAPPING
3-065-477-01 COVER C (12), HINGE
256
257
258
259
260
X-3951-206-1 HINGE (12) ASSY
1-960-975-11 HARNESS (PD-110)
3-065-478-01 COVER M (12), HINGE
4-974-725-01 SCREW (M1.7X2.5), P
1-418-802-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PR-10000)
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
261
262
263
264
265
Description
A-7074-713-A PD-131 (XC-2.5) BOARD, COMPLETE
3-968-729-51 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
3-065-475-01 FRAME (12), PANEL
X-3951-199-1 CABINET M (12) ASSY, P
3-948-339-81 TAPPING
Remarks
266
266
3-065-529-01 PLATE (12), PANEL ORNAMENT (TRV130)
3-065-529-11 PLATE (12), PANEL ORNAMENT (TRV130E)
LCD901 1-803-859-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST (SERVICE)
0 ND901
1-517-752-41 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE
6-6
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-1-7. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY, DRUM ASSY
701
702
M901
705
706
LS chassis block assembly
(See page 6-8)
707
708
703
709
704
701
Mechanical chassis block assembly
(See page 6-9 to 6-10)
710
Ref. No.
Part No.
701
702
703
704
705
Description
3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA
3-065-895-01 LEVER, REEL RELEASE
3-065-896-01 PLATE, BLIND
X-3951-298-1 CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY
X-3951-302-1 DAMPER ASSY
706 X-3951-297-1 GEAR ASSY, R DRIVE
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
707
708
709
710
3-065-840-01 CUT (0.98X3X0.13), LUMILER (W)
3-065-935-01 HLC CUT 1.8X4X0.5
3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4)
X-3951-299-1 SCREW ASSY, DRUM FITTING
M901 A-7048-951-A DRUM (DKH-04A-R)(SERVICE)
Remarks
6-7
6-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY
759
757
758
760
S001
762
763
765
761
764
756
766
755
Q001
S002 not supplied
H001
LS-057 not supplied
FP-301 not supplied
FP-300 not supplied
FP-302 not supplied
D001
H002
Q002 not supplied
752
774
772
775
777
776
778
779
767
773
768
769
770
771
780
781
754
753
752
783
751
782
Ref. No.
Part No.
751
752
753
754
755
Description
3-065-822-01 RAIL (S), GUIDE
3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4)
A-7096-416-A BASE (S) BLOCK ASSY, GUIDE
A-7096-415-A BASE (T) BLOCK ASSY, GUIDE
A-7096-426-A CHASSIS ASSY, LS
761
762
763
764
765
756
757
758
759
760
766
767
768
769
770
3-065-802-01 SPRING, TG7 ARM
A-7096-414-A ARM BLOCK ASSY, TRG7
3-065-801-01 RETAINER, TG7
3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA
X-3951-303-1 ARM ASSY, PINCH
3-065-823-01 ARM, T RATCHET
3-065-794-01 ROAD (SPR), PINCH ARM
3-065-792-01 ROLLER, P LIM ARM
3-065-834-01 GUIDE (T), CASSETTE
3-065-824-01 SPRING, T RATCHET
A-7096-417-A SOFT ASSY, T
7-627-852-38 SCREW, PRECISION +P1.7X1.8 TYPE3
3-065-832-01 PLATE, LS CAM
3-065-828-01 ARM, S RATCHET
3-065-829-01 PLATE, S RATCHET (RE)
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
771
772
773
774
775
Description
3-065-830-01 SPRING, S RATCHET
X-3951-288-1 TABLE (T) ASSY, REEL
3-065-819-01 SPRING, TG1 ARM
3-065-821-01 RAIL (T), GUIDE
X-3951-289-1 TABLE (S) ASSY, REEL
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
H002
D001
Q001
Q002
3-065-833-01 GUIDE, LOCK
3-065-831-01 PLATE (SPR), RE RETURN
X-3951-304-1 ARM ASSY, TG1
3-065-835-01 GUIDE (S), CASSETTE
3-065-820-01 SPRING, RVS ARM
X-3951-296-1 BAND ASSY, BT
3-065-836-01 COVER, LS GREASE
3-067-167-01 SCREW (M1.4X2), CAMERA TAPPING
S001 1-692-614-11 SWITCH, PUSH (3KEY) (REC PROOF)
H001 8-719-033-37 ELEMENT, HALL HW-105C (T REEL)
8-719-033-37 ELEMENT, HALL HW-105C (S REEL)
8-719-988-42 DIODE GL453 (TAPE LED)
Remarks
8-729-907-25 PHOTO TRANSISTOR PT4850F (TAPE TOP)
8-729-907-25 PHOTO TRANSISTOR PT4850F (TAPE END)
6-8
6-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
811
805
M902
809
810
807
802
815
814
813
812
806
802
808
804
803
820
816
805
815
824
817
819
not supplied
818
815
821
822
823
802
M903
Mechanical chassis block assembly-2
(See page 6-10)
801
Ref. No.
Part No.
801
802
803
804
805
Description
A-7096-422-A BASE ASSY, DRUM
3-947-503-01 SCREW (M1.4)
3-065-928-01 SPACER, GROUND
3-065-927-01 GROUND, DRUM
3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
3-067-154-01 SPRING, CAPSTAN
3-065-931-01 RAIL (T2), GUIDE
X-3947-398-1 SCREW ASSY, M1.7 PW
3-065-933-01 PAN (2 MAIN 1.4X4.5), CAMERA
1-677-049-11 FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD (DEW SENSOR)
1-680-434-11 FP-299 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-877-01 PLATE (T), GUIDE LOCK
X-3951-301-1 PLATE ASSY, PINCH PRESSURE
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
814
815
816
817
818
Description
3-065-881-01 SPRING, P PRESSURE PLATE
3-065-934-01 HLW CUT 0.98X3X0.25
1-786-096-11 SWITCH, ROTALY
3-065-898-01 SPRING, EJECT ARM
3-065-870-01 ROLLER, LS GUIDE
819
820
821
822
823
824
A-7096-421-A ARM ASSY, HCL
3-065-918-01 GEAR (2), CAM RELAY
A-7096-419-A GEAR ASSY, CHANGE
3-065-902-01 BELT, TIMING
3-065-905-01 GEAR, RELAY
3-065-882-01 ARM, EJECT
M902 8-835-701-01 MOTOR, DC SCE13A/C-NP (CAPSTAN)
M903 A-7096-420-A MOTOR ASSY, LD (LOADING)
Remarks
6-9
6-1-10. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
861
860
859
857
862
863
858
851
853
852
855
854
856
867
865
866
864
868
Ref. No.
Part No.
851
852
853
854
855
Description
3-065-920-01 ARM, HC DRIVE
3-065-913-01 GEAR (4), LD
3-065-914-01 SHEET, COVER
3-065-917-01 GEAR (1), CAM RELAY
3-065-934-01 HLW CUT 0.98X3X0.25
856
857
858
859
3-065-915-01 GEAR (1), CAM
3-065-878-01 PLATE (S), GUIDE LOCK
3-065-932-01 PAN (2 MAIN M1.4X1.6), CAMERA
A-7096-413-A GEAR (S) ASSY, GUIDE
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
860
861
862
863
864
Description
7-624-101-04 STOP RING 1.2 (E TYPE)
A-7096-412-A GEAR (T) ASSY, GUIDE
X-3951-307-1 PLATE ASSY, M SLIDE
X-3951-305-1 ARM ASSY, LS
3-065-901-01 ROLLER, LS ARM
865
866
867
868
3-065-916-01 GEAR (2), CAM
3-065-919-01 ARM, T1 LIMITTER
X-3951-308-1 ARM ASSY, GL
X-3951-300-1 CHASSIS ASSY, MECHANICAL
Remarks
6-10
CD-281 MI-041
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• CAPACITORS: uF: µF
• RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
• COILS uH: µH
• SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example: uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uPD..., µPD...
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
HK : Hong Kong model
AUS : Australian model
JE : Tourist model
CN : Chinese model
KR : Korea model
BR : Brazilian model
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
A-7074-712-A CD-281 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(Ref.No.;1000Series)
(IC191 is not included in this complete board.)
When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
Description Remarks
C764 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10% 16V
C768 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF
10% 25V
C769 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF
10% 16V
C770 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF
10% 16V
C772 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF
10% 25V
< CAPACITOR >
C191 1-126-395-11 ELECT 22uF
C195 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C196 1-128-994-21 ELECT CHIP 47uF
C197 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
20% 16V
25V
20% 10V
10% 10V
C773 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
10% 16V
C774 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF
10% 25V
C775 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C776 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
10% 16V
C777 1-164-343-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.056uF
10% 25V
< CONNECTOR >
CN191 1-766-344-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 14P
< IC >
C779 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10% 25V
C780 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF
10% 25V
C781 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF
10% 25V
C782 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF
10% 25V
C783 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF
10% 25V
IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130)
IC191 A-7031-209-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E)
< COIL >
L191 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR
< TRANSISTOR >
100uH
Q191 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR
< RESISTOR >
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
R191 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R192 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R193 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
R194 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R198 1-216-864-91 SHORT
0
0
3.3K
0
0
5% 1/16W
************************************************************
A-7074-709-A MI-041 BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
*******************************
A-7074-711-A MI-041 BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130)
******************************
(Ref.No.;20000Series)
< CAPACITOR >
C784 1-110-666-11 ELECT CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C785 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF
10% 25V
C786 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF
10% 25V
C788 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF
10% 25V
C789 1-110-501-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF
10% 16V
C791 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C794 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP 10uF
C799 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF
C800 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP
C808 1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP
10uF
10uF
C809 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF
C3901 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF
C3904 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C3905 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF
C3906 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF
C3907 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF
C3908 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF
C3909 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C758 1-124-778-00 ELECT CHIP 22uF
C759 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C761 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C762 1-124-778-00 ELECT CHIP 22uF
C763 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
20% 6.3V
10% 10V
10% 16V
20% 6.3V
10% 10V
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager.
6-11
C3910 1-135-210-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF
C3911 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10% 16V
20% 6.3V
10% 10V
20% 6.3V
20% 6.3V
20% 6.3V
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
20% 10V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
MI-041
Ref. No.
C3912
C3913 1-164-668-11 CERAMIC CHIP 510PF
C3914 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C3915 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C3916
C3917
C3918
C3919
C3920
C3921
C3922
C3923
C3924
C3925
C3926
C3929
C3930
C3931
C3935
1-104-847-11 TANTAL. CHIP
1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP
C3932 1-110-453-11 ELECT CHIP
1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP
22uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
4.7uF
C3933 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C3934 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
0.01uF
* CN751
1-695-320-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM) (SMD) 2P
* CN752 1-695-320-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM) (SMD) 2P
CN753 1-779-336-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 24P
D752 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
D753 8-719-070-91 DIODE TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
D754 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
D755 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
D3901 8-719-067-44 DIODE CL-310IRS-X-TU
D3902
D3903
Part No.
Description
1-110-446-11 ELECT CHIP
1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-162-913-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-162-921-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP
1-162-922-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP
< CONNECTOR >
< DIODE >
8-719-083-13 DIODE DCS2815
8-719-067-44 DIODE CL-310IRS-X-TU
< IC >
10uF
1uF
0.1uF
8PF
0.47uF
0.47uF
33PF
1uF
39PF
1uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
5% 50V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 10V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
20% 4V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
20% 16V
10% 10V
10% 10V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
20% 6.3V
(TRV130)
5% 50V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
10% 16V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
L751
L3902
L3903
L3904
L3905
L3906
Description
< COIL >
1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR
1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR
1-412-948-11 INDUCTOR
1-412-957-11 INDUCTOR
1-412-957-11 INDUCTOR
1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR
< TRANSISTOR >
10% 10V
(TRV130)
0.50PF 50V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
10% 6.3V
(TRV130)
5% 50V
(TRV130)
Q3901
Q3902
Q3903
Q3904
8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR
8-729-026-48 TRANSISTOR
8-729-920-85 TRANSISTOR
8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR
< RESISTOR >
10uH
10uH
5.6uH
33uH
33uH
10uH
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
Remarks
2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
(TRV130)
2SA1037AK-T146-Q
(TRV130)
2SD1664-T100-QR (TRV130)
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
(TRV130E)
R757 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP
R761 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP
R764 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP
R765 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP
R766 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP
R767 1-216-830-11 METAL CHIP
R768 1-216-831-11 METAL CHIP
R769 1-216-831-11 METAL CHIP
R770 1-216-836-11 METAL CHIP
R771 1-216-864-91 SHORT
2.2K
2.2K
5.6K
5.6K
5.6K
5.6K
6.8K
6.8K
18K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
R772
R774
R775
R776
R779
R786
1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-836-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-864-91 SHORT
1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
R780 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
R782 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
R783 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
R785 1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-864-91 SHORT
4.7K
18K
4.7K
0
1M
10K
10K
1M
15K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
(TRV130)
(TRV130)
(TRV130E)
R788 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP
R789 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP
R797 1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP
R3901 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP
R3902 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP
R3903
R3904
R3905
R3907
R3908
1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP
33K
33K
1.8K
33K
4.7K
33K
12K
1M
22K
330
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
5%
5%
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
IC751 8-749-012-83 IC RS-180-T
IC752 8-759-712-78 IC BH7871FV-E2
IC753 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
IC3901 8-759-566-96 IC AN2920FHQ-EB (TRV130)
6-12
MI-041 PD-131
Ref. No.
R3909
R3912
R3913
R3914
R3915
R3916
R3917
R3919
R3920
R3921
R3922
R3923
R3924
R3925
R3925
R3926
R3927
R3929
R3931
R3946
Part No.
Description
1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-819-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-818-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-831-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-864-91 SHORT
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-295-11 SHORT
1-216-001-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-800-11 RES-CHIP
1-216-295-11 SHORT
1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-840-11 METAL CHIP
1K
680
150K
150K
560
6.8K
470
1.5K
470
470
0
470
0
10
120
18
0
120
12K
39K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
C5512
C5513
Description
C5507 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C5508 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C5509 1-126-602-11 ELECT CHIP 3.3uF
C5510 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C5511 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
20%
10%
5%
Remarks
16V
10V
50V
16V
50V
10% 10V
10% 10V
C5514 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
C5515 1-164-357-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF
5% 50V
C5516 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5% 50V
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
C5517
C5518
C5519
C5520
C5521
C5522
C5523
C5524
1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP
1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
10uF
1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
1uF
C5527 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C5529 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
16V
16V
16V
16V
10V
10V
16V
16V
10V (TRV130)
5% 1/16W
(TRV130E)
(TRV130)
5% 1/10W
(TRV130)
5% 1/10W
(TRV130E)
C5603 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF
10% 50V
C5604 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C5605
0 C5606
C5607
1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP
1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP
1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
12PF
4.7uF
10% 10V
10% 10V
10% 3KV
10% 10V
< CONNECTOR >
5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
(TRV130E)
5% 1/10W
5%
5%
(TRV130E)
1/16W
(TRV130)
1/16W
(TRV130)
CN5501 1-815-031-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
* CN5502 1-573-984-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 10P
CN5601 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P
CN5701 1-794-998-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 20P
CN5702 1-573-346-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
< DIODE >
(TRV130E)
D5502 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A
D5601 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
R3948 1-216-295-11 SHORT 0
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK > < FERRITE BEAD >
RB751
RB752
1-239-702-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 22K
1-239-702-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 22K
RB3901 1-239-695-81 RESISTOR, NETWORK 5.6K
< SENSOR >
(TRV130)
FB5501 1-414-760-21 FERRITE
FB5502 1-414-760-21 FERRITE
< IC >
0uH
0uH
SE751
SE752
1-803-042-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
1-803-042-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW)
************************************************************
IC5501 8-759-660-92 IC RB5P003AM1
IC5502 8-759-696-68 IC CM7020L1-E2
IC5601 8-759-564-49 IC TC7W53FU(TE12R)
IC5602 8-759-075-70 IC TA75S393F-TE85R
A-7074-713-A PD-131 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(Ref.No.;30000Series)
< CAPACITOR >
C5501 1-135-201-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF
C5503 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C5504 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
C5505 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
C5506 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
< COIL >
L5501 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR
L5502 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR
L5503 1-412-956-21 INDUCTOR
L5601 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR
10uH
10uH
27uH
100uH
20% 4V
10% 10V
10% 10V
10% 16V
10% 16V
< TRANSISTOR >
6-13
Q5501 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR
Q5601 8-729-042-29 TRANSISTOR
Q5602 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR
Q5603 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
RN1104F(TPL3)
FP216-TL
RN4983FE(TPLR3)
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
PD-131 VC-256
Ref. No.
R5501
R5503
R5504
R5505
R5506
R5511
Part No.
Description
< RESISTOR >
1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP
1-218-895-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-826-11 METAL CHIP
R5507 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP
R5508 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP
R5509 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP
R5510 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
R5512 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
R5514 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5516 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
R5517 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP
R5518 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5520 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5521 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP
R5522 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP
R5523 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5525 1-216-864-91 SHORT
47K
68K
22K
68K
1M
470K
100K
100K
15K
2.7K
100K
0
10K
220K
0
0
47K
1.5K
0
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
Description Remarks
A-7096-408-A VC-256 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
**********************
(Ref.No.;10000Series) 5% 1/16W
0.5% 1/16W
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
************************************************************
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R5526 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP
R5528 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5529 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5530 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5535 1-216-806-11 RES-CHIP
R5539 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5601
R5602
R5603
R5604
1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-824-11 METAL CHIP
R5606 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP
R5607 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
R5610 1-216-864-91 SHORT
R5702 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
R5703 1-216-864-91 SHORT
470K
0
0
0
56
0
1.8K
100K
12K
1.8K
22K
470
0
10K
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
RB5501 1-234-372-21 RES, NETWORK 100X4 (1005)
RB5601 1-239-698-11 RESISTOR, NETWORK 10K
1/16W
1/16W
< TRANSFORMER >
0 T5601
1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER
************************************************************
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
Electrical parts list of the VC-256 board are not shown.
Pages 6-15 to 6-22 are not shown.
6-14
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
VF-129
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
A-7073-838-A VF-129 (N) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130)
*********************************
A-7073-855-A VF-129 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (TRV130E)
**********************************
(Ref.No.;1000Series)
R911 1-216-160-00 RES-CHIP
R912 1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
R915 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP
R916
Description
1-218-881-11 METAL CHIP
R917 1-218-891-11 METAL CHIP < CAPACITOR >
C901 1-107-854-11 TANTAL. CHIP 68uF
C902 1-163-038-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
20% 6.3V
25V
C903 1-135-145-11 TANTAL. CHIP 0.47uF
10% 35V
C904 1-162-965-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0015uF
10% 50V
C905 1-104-752-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 6.3V
R917 1-218-893-11 METAL CHIP
R918 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP
R919 1-216-843-11 METAL CHIP
R920 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP
R921 1-216-795-11 RES-CHIP C906 1-162-638-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF
C907 1-104-563-11 FILM CHIP 0.1uF
C908 1-162-920-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF
5%
5%
16V
16V
50V
C909 1-163-009-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF
10% 50V
0 C910
1-162-625-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF
5% 50V
0 C911
1-164-715-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068uF
5%
C912 1-107-854-11 TANTAL. CHIP 68uF 20%
50V
6.3V
C913 1-135-145-11 TANTAL. CHIP 0.47uF
C914 1-113-984-11 TANTAL. CHIP 1.5uF
10%
20%
35V
35V
C915 1-163-037-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF
10% 25V
R922
R923
R924
R925
R926
1-216-850-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-857-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-862-11 RES-CHIP
1-216-862-11 RES-CHIP
1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP
R927 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP
R928 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
R929 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP
R930 1-216-791-11 METAL CHIP
R931 1-217-671-11 METAL CHIP C916 1-135-475-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF
10% 630V
< CONNECTOR >
* CN901 1-785-379-01 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 4P
* CN902
1-580-057-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 4P
< DIODE >
R932 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K
< VARIABLE RESISTOR >
RV903
RV904
27
1M
22K
27K
68K
82K
4.7K
68K
22K
6.8
270K
1M
2.7M
2.7M
1K
1K
3.3K
1K
3.3
1
1-238-852-11 RES, ADJ, CERMET 470
1-238-095-11 RES, ADJ, CERMET 470K
D901
D903
IC901
8-719-951-21 DIODE PR1102W-TR
8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
< IC >
8-759-196-14 IC BA7149F-E2
< TRANSFORMER >
0 T901
1-453-124-11 TRANSFORMER ASSY, FLYBACK
< FLAT CABLE >
0 W901
1-540-019-21 SOCKET ASSY, CRT
************************************************************ < COIL >
L901 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH
L902 1-410-387-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 33uH
0 L903
1-411-697-11 COIL, FERRITE (HLC)
< TRANSISTOR >
Q901
Q902
Q903
Q904
8-729-230-63 TRANSISTOR
8-729-106-68 TRANSISTOR
8-729-216-31 TRANSISTOR
8-729-230-63 TRANSISTOR
< RESISTOR >
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
2SD1615-T1GLGK
2SA1163G-TE85L
2SD1819A-QRS-TX
R901
R902
R903
R904
R905
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP
R906 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP
R907 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
R908 1-216-852-11 METAL CHIP
R909 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
R910 1-216-835-11 METAL CHIP
470
470
1.8K
10K
1.2K
1.5K
100K
390K
10K
15K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ACCESSORIES
***********
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
Remarks
5%
5%
1/8W
1/16W
0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130E)
0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130)
0.5% 1/16W
(TRV130E)
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
1-475-141-61 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-814)
(TRV130/TRV130E)
1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10A)
(TRV130:US,CND,E,HK,BR/TRV130E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS)
1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10A)(TRV130:KR)
1-475-599-81 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10B)(TRV130E:CN)
1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P
(TRV130:E,HK/TRV130E:E,HK)
1-573-291-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 21P
(TRV130E:AEP,UK)
1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130E:AUS)
1-765-080-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CABLE)(1.5m)
1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:E/TRV130E:AEP,E)
1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:KR)
1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130E:CN)
1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (TRV130:HK/TRV130E:UK,HK)
1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (TRV130:US,CND)
3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER
A-7094-140-A NP-F330 BATTERY PACK (TRV130:US,CND)
Note :
The components identified by mark
0
or dotted line with mark
0
are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0
sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-23
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description Remarks
A-7094-141-A NP-F330 BATTERY PACK (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
A-7094-141-B NP-F330 BATTERY PACK
(TRV130:E,HK,KR,BR/TRV130E:HK,E,AUS,CN)
X-3949-376-1 CAP (N) ASSY,LENS
3-742-854-01 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-814)
3-065-651-11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ENGLISH)
(TRV130:US,CND,E,HK)
3-065-651-21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (FRENCH)
(TRV130:CND)
3-065-651-31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (TRV130:E,BR)
3-065-651-41 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(TRANDTIONAL CHINESE) (TRV130:E,HK)
3-065-651-51 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (KOREAN)
(TRV130:KR)
3-065-651-61 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ARABIC)
(TRV130:E)
3-065-652-11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(ENGLISH/RUSSIAN) (TRV130E:AEP,UK)
3-065-652-21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(FRENCH/GERMAN) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ENGLISH/DUTCH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-41 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-51 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (ITALIAN/GREEK)
(TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-61 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(ENGLISH/SWEDISH) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-71 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (FINNISH/DANISH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-81 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (POLISH/CZECH)
(TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-652-91 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(SLOVAKIAN/HUNGARIAN) (TRV130E:AEP)
3-065-653-11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(ENGLISH/RUSSIAN) (TRV130E:E,HK,AUS,CN)
3-065-653-21 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(FRENCH/GERMAN) (TRV130E:E)
3-065-653-31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(ARABIC/PERSIAN) (TRV130E:E)
3-065-653-41 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (TRV130E:E,CN)
3-065-653-51 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
(TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (TRV130E:HK)
6-24E
〈
FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
〉
For NTSC model
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
✂
For PAL model
DCR-TRV130
— 179 —
DCR-TRV130E
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
9-929-860-32
Sony EMCS Co.
— 180 —
2001E1600-1
©2001.5
Published by DI Customer Center
SERVICE MANUAL
Level 2
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
RMT-814
US Model
Canadian Model
Korea Model
Brazilian Model
DCR-TRV130
AEP Model
UK Model
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-TRV130E
E Model
Hong Kong Model
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SUPPLEMENT-1
File this supplement with the Service Manual.
(PV01-032)
Subject
• This SUPPLEMENT-1 describes the change of the CCD imager of the DCR-TRV130
(NTSC model) from type S to type M.
The following contents are added in accordance with this change.
CCD BLOCK ASSY
VC-256 Board (for service)
Type S
A-7030-821-A
A-7096-408-A
(1-680-212-11)
Type M
A-7031-203-A
A-7096-407-A
(1-680-212-13)
Note: See page 2 “Discrimination of the CCD imager type” on how to identify the
CCD imager type S from type M.
• The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel is supplied as the block assembly.
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Discrimination of the CCD imager type
Check the following data
Page
7
7
F
F
F
F
Address
A2
A3
3B
DD
DF
FB
Type S
Data
Type M
00
00
57
88
4A
72
D0
01
70
52
E0
81
Discrimination of the lens type
1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 65, and press PAUSE button.
2) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 19.
3) Select page: 1. and check the display data.
DisplayData
Glass type
0000
Plastic type
0001
Note:
1 : XX : XX
Display data
4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press PAUSE button.
5) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-2.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ··············································· 3
• CD-281 (CCD IMAGER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································· 3
5.
ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Before starting adjustment ·················································· 4
1-1.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ····· 4
3.
F Page Table ······································································· 6
4.
E Page Table ······································································· 7
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 8
0-1.
Lens Type Input ·································································· 8
0-2.
CCD Imager Type Input (DCR-TRV130 (NTSC)) ············ 8
8.
Auto White Balance Adjustment ········································ 9
6.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1.
EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································· 10
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION ················································ 10
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································· 10
6-1-4. LENS SECTION ······························································ 10
— 2 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS < Page 4-8 >
1
2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
CD-281 BOARD
CCD IMAGER
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
TO
VC-256 BOARD(1/15)
CN1501
THROUGH
THE FP-259
FLEXIBLE
(SEE PAGE 4-31)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
CN191 14P
GND
CAM_-7.5V
VSHT
CAM_12V
GND
CCD OUT
GND
RG
H1
H2
V4
V3
V2
V1
14
13
12
11
8
7
10
9
3
2
1
6
5
4
C196
47u
10V
R194
0
R195
XX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5
1
4
2
IC191
CCD IMAGER
3
IC191
ICX089AK-43
ICX091KA-43
:TRV130
:TRV130E
MN39230FHJ-S :TRV130
TYPE M MODEL
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
D
R192
0
R198
0
C197
0.1u
B
E
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y
REC
PB
Y/CHROMA
L191
100uH
R191
0
1608
C191
22u
16V
R8.5/P0
R193
3.3k
1608
Q191
2SC4178-F13F14-T1
BUFFER
R9.2/P0
6
F
G
16
TYPE M MODEL :DCR-TRV130
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
• The CD-281 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager.
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts nor exposed to strong light.
H
C195
0.1u
F
C194
XX
C193
XX
B
LND191
— 3 —
CCD IMAGER
CD-281
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 5. ADJUSTMENTS
Page
Type S
1.
Before starting adjustment
1-1.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z
in the following table.
Block replacement
Replaced parts
Parts replacement
:
Added portion.
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
5-2
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
z z z
Type M
Block replacement z z z z z z z z
Replaced parts
Parts replacement z
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
Lens type input
CCD imager type input *4
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
z z z z
— 4 —
z z z z z z z z z z
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Page
:
Added portion.
Type S
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
Board replacement
*1: When replacing the drum assy. or mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to
“Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*2: When replacing the video light, reset the data of page:
2, address: E0 to E2 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*3: When replacing the EL-Back light, reset the data of page: 2, address: E3 to E5 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of
Use check” of “5-4. SERVICE MODE”)
*4: NTSC model only
5-3
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
C i dj z z z z z z z z z z z z
Type M
z z z z z z
Board replacement
Adjustment
Section
Adjustment
Initialization of
C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data
Initialization of C, D, 8 page data
Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
Camera
Lens type input
CCD imager type input *4
HALL adj.
Flange back adj.
Color reproduction adj.
AWB & LV standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Angular velocity sensor sens. adj.
C i dj z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
— 5 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Page
Type S
3. F Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
:
Added portion.
Type M
:
Changed portion.
3. F Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
Address
Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 0F
10 to 27
28
29 to 37
38
39
3A
68
80
8D
68
80
8D
3B
3C
3D
80
7A
80
7A
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
HALL adj.
Fixed data-2
Auto white balance & LV standard data Input
Address
Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 0F
10 to 27
28
29 to 2B
2C
2D to 37
38
Remark
68 68
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
D6(*1) D6(*1) Lens type input
D7(*2) D7(*2)
Fixed data-1
HALL adj.
3B
3C
4A(*5)
70(*6)
80 80
CCD imager type input (*3)
Fixed data-2 (*4)
Auto white balance & LV standard
5-11
5-12
DA
DB to DE
DF
E0 to E9
FA
FB to FF
31 11 Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-5.
DA
DB to DC
DD
31
72(*5)
52(*6)
DE
DF D0(*5)
E0(*6)
E0 to E9
FA
FB
FC to FF
01(*5)
81(*6)
11 Color reproduction adj.
Fixed data-1
CCD imager type input (*3)
Fixed data-1 (*4)
Fixed data-1
CCD imager type input (*3)
Fixed data-2 (*4)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
CCD imager type input (*3)
Fixed data-1 (*4)
Fixed data-1
*1: Glass type lens
*2: Plastic type lens
*3: NTSC model
*4: PAL model
*5: NTSC model with CCD type S
*6: NTSC model with CCD type M
Table. 5-1-5.
— 6 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Page
Type S
4. E Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
:
Added portion.
Type M
:
Changed portion.
4. E Page Table
Note:
Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
7 Page Data”.)
5-12
Address
00 to 03
57
58 to 7D
7E
7F to FF
Remark
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-6.
Address
Initial value
NTSC PAL
00 to 03
Remark
Fixed data-1
57
58 to 5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60 to 7D
7E
7F to FF
21(*1) 21(*1)
22(*2) 22(*2)
84(*1) 84(*1)
51(*2) 51(*2)
FC(*1) FC(*1)
FD(*2) FD(*2)
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
Lens type input
F7(*1) F7(*1)
C4(*2) C4(*2)
Fixed data-1
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-1
*1: Glass type lens
*2: Plastic type lens
Table. 5-1-6.
— 7 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
:
Added portion.
Page
Type M
1-3.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are satisfied.
0-1. Lens Type Input 0-2. CCD Imager Type Input (DCR-TRV130 (NTSC))
Distinguish the type of the lens being used for the camcorder, and input data corresponding to the type.
Distinguish the type of the CCD imager used for the camcorder, and input data corresponding to the type.
Subject
Measurement Point
Not required
Display data of page 1 (Note)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Subject
Measurement Point
Not required
Display data of page 6 (Note)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
E F
5C, 5D, 5E, 5F 2C
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
7
A2, A3
F
3B, DD DF, FB
5-13
Note:
Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX
Display data
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1 0 01
Procedure
01 Set the data.
1
2
3
0
6
Procedure
01 01 Set the data.
04 Check that the data is “00” to “21”.
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
E
01
03
65
19
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
Check that the data.
When the data is “0000”, proceed to step 5. (Glass lens type)
When the data is “0001”, proceed to step 11. (Plastic lens type)
5C 21 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
4
5
6
7
7
F
Check that the type of the CCD imager.
When the CCD type M is used, proceed to step 4.
When the CCD type S is used, proceed to step 11.
A2 57 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
A3 88 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
3B 70 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
8
9
6
7
E
E
E
F
5D
5E
5F
2C
84
FC
F7
D6
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
7
8
9
10
F DD 52 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
F DF E0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
F FB 81 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Proceed to step 17.
10
11
12
13
E
E
E
5C
5D
5E
22
51
FD
Proceed to step 16.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
11
12
13
14
7
7
A2 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
A3 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
F 3B 4A Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
F DD 72 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
14
15
16
17
E
F
6
0
5F C4 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
2C D7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
01
03
00
00
Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Set the data.
15
16
17
F
F
0
DF D0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
FB 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
01 01 Set the data.
18 0 01 00 Set the data.
1. HALL Adjustment
For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and offset.
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
F
38, 39, 3A
Specified Value 1
Specified Value 2
88 to 8C
15 to 19
— 8 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
Page
Type S
8. Auto White Balance Adjustment
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data.
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor.
Subject Clear chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
Filter
Measurement Point
Filter C14 for color temperature correction
Display data of page 1 (Note3)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
42, 43
NTSC model
R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0
B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0
PAL model
R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0
Specified Value
:
Added portion.
Type M
:
Changed portion.
NTSC model (CCD type S)
R ratio: 2C40 to 2CC0
B ratio: 5E20 to 5EE0
PAL model
R ratio: 2D40 to 2DC0
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0
NTSC model (CCD type M)
R ratio: 29C0 to 2A40
B ratio: 61A0 to 6260
5-19
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2 0
Procedure
Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens.
01 01 Set the data.
3
4
F
F
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
F
F
F
F
F
F
6
B8
B8
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2C (NTSC), 2D (PAL)
B9 Write down the data.
B9 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
BA Write down the data.
BA Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
5E (NTSC), 5B (PAL)
Write down the data.
BB
BB 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
01 A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data
1
2 0
Procedure
Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens.
01 01 Set the data.
3
4
F
F
B8
B8
5
6
F
F
B9
B9
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2C (NTSC (CCD type S)), 2D (PAL)
2A (NTSC (CCD type M))
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
80 (NTSC (CCD type S)), 80 (PAL)
00 (NTSC (CCD type M))
7
8
9
10
11
F
F
F
F
6
BA
BA
Write down the data.
Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
5E (NTSC (CCD type S)), 5B (PAL)
62 (NTSC (CCD type M))
Write down the data.
BB
BB Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
80 (NTSC (CCD type S)), 80 (PAL)
00 (NTSC (CCD type M))
01 A7 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
— 9 —
DCR-TRV130/TRV130E
SECTION 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST
6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
Page
Old
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION
: Added portion. : Changed portion.
New
6-1-5. CABINET (R) SECTION
: Deleted portion.
A
B
207
A
B
210
C C
LCD902
206
D901
206
D901
6-5
201 201
Ref. No.
Part No.
207
208
209
Description
1-680-201-11 FP-260 FLEXIBLE BOARD
1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295)
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
0 D901
1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS
Remarks Ref. No.
Part No.
LCD902 1-804-272-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
208
209
Description
1-757-397-21 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-295)
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
210 A-7096-931-A LCD BLOCK ASSY (FOR SERVICE)
0 D901
1-518-724-11 ELEMENT, ELECTRO LUMINOUS
Remarks
S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH S901 1-771-848-11 SWITCH, PUSH
6-2
66
67
68
69
70
65
Type S
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION
A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE
(SERVICE)
3-948-339-61 TAPPING
1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING
Type M
66
67
68
69
70
6-1-2. CABINET (L) SECTION
65
65
A-7096-407-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE
(SERVICE)(TRV130)
A-7096-408-A VC-256 (IB-S) BOARD, COMPLETE
(SERVICE)(TRV130E)
3-948-339-61 TAPPING
1-680-200-11 FP-259 FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-065-662-01 LABEL, LS CAUTION
3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
3-067-254-01 SHEET (10), ABSORBING
6-4
6-1-4. LENS SECTION
160
161
161
162
163
1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E)
3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130)
A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE
3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING
6-1-4. LENS SECTION
160
161
161
162
163
1-758-216-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
3-953-817-01 RUBBER (F), SEAL (TRV130E)
3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD (TRV130)
A-7074-712-A CD-281 (X) BOARD,COMPLETE
3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING
IC191 A-7030-821-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130) IC191 A-7031-203-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130)
IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E) IC191 A-7031-206-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(TRV130E)
9-929-860-81
Sony EMCS Co.
— 10 —
2001K1600-1
©2001.11
Published by DI Customer Center
Reverse
992986033.pdf
Revision History
Ver.
1.0
1.1
1.2
Date
2001.01
2001.05
History
Official Release
Correction
2001.11
(PV01-032)
Contents
—
Error correction
S.M. correction: Page
• The change of the CCD imager of the DCR-
TRV130 (NTSC model) from type S to type M.
• The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel is supplied as the block assembly.
S.M. Rev.
issued
—
Yes
No

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Combined power zoom lens
- 2 rotary heads system
- Helical scanning system
- Audio recording system
- NightShot/Super NightShot
- InfoLITHIUM battery pack
- i.LINK connection
- Digital effect
- Picture effect
- Tape photo recording